JP6888277B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control means such as a CPU, a read-only storage means such as a ROM, and a read / write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes the process according to the program read from the read-only storage means while writing the information to the read / write storage means and reading the information from the storage means. When executing this process, information is input from the sensor or the like to the control means, and information is output from the control means to the electric actuator or the light emitting element. It is also known that a control means, a read-only storage means, a read / write storage means, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet, a winning combination lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process of the winning combination is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control at. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the winning combination, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination. As the grant of the privilege, for example, a game medium is granted (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-045989

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a pattern display means for variablely displaying a pattern and a pattern display means.
The start operation means operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the start operation means.
A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and a combination lottery means.
A stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means that controls the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control for the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination. The means of execution and
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result in the situation where it is the first set value among the set values of the plurality of stages, the first stop mode can be notified as the stop mode of the variation display of the pattern. to, when the result of the lottery process of the role in a situation which is the second set value among the plurality of stages of set value is a special result above and special informing means the first stop mode from being informed ,
When the notification of the stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means under the control of the special notification means, the display corresponding to the type of the notified stop mode is executed by the second notification execution means. Notification control means and
Equipped with a,
The notification control means is a means for causing the second notification execution means to display a number corresponding to the first set value when the first stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means. characterized in that it comprises a.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window part, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode to be established when the lottery table for a normal mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode established when the lottery table for 1st RT mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode which holds when the lottery table for 2nd RT mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop preparation process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop information setting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) priority information area. It is a flowchart which shows the priority information creation process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of winning which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the slip number acquisition process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BB state executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transition chance management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows ART preparation state processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows ART state processing executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the transition probability to the AT state in a non-BB state and a set value, and (b) the relationship between the addition probability of the number of continuous games in an AT state, and a set value is explained. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining (c) the relationship between the advantageous winning probability and the set value in the BB state. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process of the lottery mode executed by the main MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the promotion lottery table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition winning probability in the low probability mode, and (c) explaining the transition winning probability in the high probability mode. It is explanatory drawing for this. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from the display window part in 3rd Embodiment, and the combination line. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the type of the main line in the case of the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the case of the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, and the case where the watermelon prize is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the type of the main line in the case of the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, and the case where the watermelon prize is established in the case of the index value IV = 3 in the BB state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the transition probability to the AT state in a non-BB state and a set value, and (b) the relationship between the addition probability of the number of continuous games in an AT state, and a set value is explained. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining (c) the relationship between the advantageous winning probability and the set value in the BB state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the transition probability to the AT state in a non-BB state and a set value in 4th Embodiment, and (b) the addition probability and setting of the number of continuous games in an AT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with a value, and is (c) explanatory diagram for demonstrating the relationship between the advantageous winning probability in a BB state, and a set value. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal mode in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a lottery table for BB. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given in the 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st addition table, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd addition table. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the main MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the main MPU in 8th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st addition table, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd addition table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal mode in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode to be established when the lottery table for a normal mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode which holds when the lottery table for 2nd RT mode is selected. (A) is a front view of the special figure display unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special display unit. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the notification content in an image display device, and the notification content in a special display unit. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the dummy notification process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the addition probability of the number of continuous games in AT state, and the set value, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the dummy notification table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the dummy notification table in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the main MPU in eleventh embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the addition probability of the number of continuous games in AT state, and the set value, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the dummy notification table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a special display part. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the dummy notification table. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the main MPU in 13th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the addition probability of the number of continuous games in AT state, and the set value, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the dummy notification table.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels. A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed with the left side portion as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key on the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of these reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. If the start lever 41 is operated while the medal is bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped, respectively. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are in a state in which they can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 32L.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal is awarded. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as the management of the game state is completed.

On the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and when reception is prohibited. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59. The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established on the effective line. There is.

Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when the medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time and two virtual medals at a time are inserted. A second credit insertion button 48 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 58 as a real medal.

As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting states of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 57, which is operated to change within the range of "setting 6", is provided.

<Designs attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 3 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in FIG. 3, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers from "0" to "19" are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are visible to the main control device 70 from the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L), a "cherry" symbol (for example, the 17th on the left reel 32L), and " "Replay" symbol (for example, 16th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (for example, 13th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (for example, 13th on left reel 32L) For example, there are eight types: the 12th of the left reel 32L) and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the 10th of the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 3, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 310, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with the specified number of medals bet and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of paying out the medals and the replay Either the benefit of the game or the transition of the gaming state is given.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the sub-line SUL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R Sub-line SUL2 connecting the connected sub-line SUL2 and the lower design of the left reel 32L, the lower design of the middle reel 32M and the lower design of the right reel 32R, and the lower design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub line SUL4 connecting the upper symbols, the prize is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 5, the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

Small role prizes for which medals are paid out include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, the watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "BAR" symbol or the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the right reel 32R. If the stop symbol is a "bell" symbol, it will be the first supplementary prize. Further, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either a "watermelon" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is. If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the third supplementary prize. In the case of any of the first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the number of game media to be granted is "1".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the bell is won. Will be. If the bell is won, the number of game media to be granted will be "9".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the watermelon wins. It becomes. If the watermelon wins, the number of game media to be granted will be "7".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won regardless of which of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

Normal replay prize, 1st RT replay prize, 2nd RT replay prize, 1st fall replay are given as prizes that can be played in the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals). There is a prize and a second fall replay prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol. In that case, it will be a normal replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first RT It will be a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second RT It will be a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first It will be a fall replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a fall replay prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, it is possible to play the next game without betting on both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, the game of the next game can be started in the state of three bets while eliminating the need for betting on both medals and virtual medals. It will be possible.

In addition, among the above-mentioned various replay prizes, the 1st RT replay prize, the 2nd RT replay prize, the 1st fall replay prize, and the 2nd fall replay prize not only serve as an opportunity to grant the benefits of the replay prize, but also as an opportunity to shift the game state. Become. In this slot machine 10, a plurality of types of gaming states are set so that the types of winning combinations to be drawn and the winning probabilities of each winning combination are different in the winning combination lottery process, and the transition between these gaming states is the transition of the gaming states. Occurs when a trigger replay prize is established.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. If it is a symbol, it will be the first BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML. , The second BB prize. When the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit number of games is higher than in the normal mode described later and in the non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state). Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit number of games is higher than any of the gaming states other than the BB state. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the bell winning is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.3) than in other gaming states, and if the winning combination is won, each reel 32L , 32M, 32R, and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing. The BB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, it is set as the end condition that the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, "350"). There is.

<Device for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is light-emitting controlled so as to perform a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled in sound output so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is displayed and controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

The game panel 20 of the front door 12 has a credit display unit 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored at positions below the display window units 21L, 21M, and 21R, and is a target of grant when a small winning combination is won. A granting number display unit 66 for displaying the number of game media is provided, respectively. These display units 65 and 66 are composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a part or all of the display units 65 and 66 is composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. May be good.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main control board 71 is housed in a board box. When opening the board box, it is necessary to release the fastened state, and a broken portion will occur when the fastened state is released. By confirming the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to simply confirm whether or not the board box has been opened.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 80 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 80 is arranged so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 63 at the front door 12. The effect control device 80 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. In the effect control device 80, the control board is housed in the board box as in the main control device 70.

<Electrical configuration of slot machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, there are a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, and each. Stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49. Credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a that individually detect the operation of the payment detection sensor 51a, the payment detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the payment button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, and the reset detection sensor 56a that detects the operation of the reset button 56. , Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 57a for detecting that the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

On the output side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, a payout motor of the hopper device 53, and an effect The control device 80 and the like are connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. As described above, the selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 53, and when reception is prohibited, the insertion medal It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the detection sensor 45a. The selector drive unit 52a has a function for switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibition position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permitted state and the reception prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. Further, the MPU 72 executes the drive control of the hopper device 53 when the small winning combination is established and the medal is paid out. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 80 at each timing of each game.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 includes a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power supply unit from an external power source. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in the situation where the backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during the power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

The effect control device 80 includes a sub control board 81 for performing various notifications and execution control of various effects. The MPU 82 is mounted on the sub control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like that output a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are built in.

It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 84 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device 54 when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 84. May be good.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 82 executes various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63. To be done. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the effect control device 80 are referred to as the effect side, respectively. It is called MPU 82, directing side ROM 83, and directing side RAM 84.

<Main processing of main MPU 72>
Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main process started in the main MPU 72 when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 7.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are performed for the register group in the main MPU 72, the I / O device, and the like.

After the initialization process is completed, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the ON operation is performed (step S102). If the ON operation is performed (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not turned ON when the power switch 55 is turned ON (step S103: NO), a partial clearing process is executed. (Step S104) If the reset button 56 is turned on when the power switch 55 is turned on (step S103: YES), the all clearing process is executed (step S105). That is, if the set value of the slot machine 10 is changed without performing the operation for initializing the main RAM 74, a partial clearing process is executed and the operation for initializing the main RAM 74 is performed. If it is done, all clear processing is executed.

In the partial clearing process, a part of the area in the main RAM 74 is initialized, and in the all clearing process, the entire area in the main RAM 74 is initialized. In the partial clearing process, the main RAM 74 has an area in which data indicating whether or not it is in the BB state is stored, an area in which data indicating the total number of gaming media granted in the BB state is stored, and whether or not it is in the AT state. Each of the main RAM 74, excluding the area in which the data indicating the above is stored, the area in which the data for specifying the end condition of the AT state is stored, and the area in which the data indicating the type of the lottery mode described later is stored. Clear the area "0". In this case, the area where the winning combination is stored is cleared to "0". In the all clearing process, the entire area of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" including the area that is excluded from the execution target of "0" clearing in the partial clearing process. As a result, even if a part of the clearing process is executed, the BB state, the AT state and the lottery mode are maintained in the state before the power is cut off, and when the all clearing process is executed, the state before the power is cut off is irrelevant. It will be in a normal game state.

The configuration is not limited to the above, and may be a configuration in which the power supply is not in the BB state when a partial clearing process is executed when the power supply is cut off in the BB state, and the power supply is in the AT state. When the power is cut off, the state may not be in the AT state when the partial clearing process is executed. When the power is cut off in the first RT mode or the second RT mode, which will be described later, the partial clearing process is performed. When it is executed, it may be configured to be in a state other than those RT modes. Further, even if a part of the clearing process is executed, the area in which the data indicating that the BB combination has been won may not be cleared by "0".

After executing the process of step S104 or step S105, the winning probability setting process is executed (step S106). In the winning probability setting process, the current set value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current set value is displayed on the grant number display unit 66 provided on the game panel 20. Since the area for storing the set value data in the main RAM 74 is surely initialized immediately before the winning probability setting process, the set value displayed on the grant number display unit 66 is set to "1". It is "1" corresponding to the value. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the grant number display unit 66. If the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the set value is the set value of "6", the set value is updated to the set value of "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set value on the grant number display unit 66 ends. After executing the winning probability setting process, the process proceeds to the normal process (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S109). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether or not the value is normal.

When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, so that the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effector MPU 82 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S114).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is prohibited (step S115), and all the actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all the output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0". Is in the OFF state (step S116), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S117). Then, it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing the all clear process (step S105).

<Timer interrupt processing of main MPU72>
Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, a stepping motor control process for driving each stepping motor is performed in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S207, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed. In step S208, it is monitored whether or not the release operation for canceling the abnormality notification is performed, and when it is specified that the release operation for canceling the abnormality notification is performed, the abnormality notification is released. An abnormality notification release command for this purpose is transmitted to the MPU 82 on the production side. As a result, the abnormality notification is canceled regardless of the situation in which any type of abnormality notification is being performed. By pressing the reset button 56 in a situation where a predetermined lock operation is being performed on the key cylinder 14, a release operation for canceling the abnormality notification is performed.

In step S209, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S210, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S211 a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 82 is performed. In step S212, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S213, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. After that, in step S214, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

<Normal processing of main MPU 72>
Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301), and then a start wait process is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, when any of the replay prizes has occurred in the previous game, an automatic insertion process is performed to make the same number of game media as the number of bets in the previous game bet. Further, in the start waiting process, when a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, if the current number of bets is not "3" or more, which is the maximum specified number, the number of bets is added by 1 and the number of bets is added. If is 3 or more, which is the maximum specified number, the value of the credit counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1. The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the main MPU 72.

In the start waiting process, when the automatic insertion process is not executed and any of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is operated, the credit for setting the bet number corresponding to the operation. Executes the input response process. In the credit insertion handling process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the maximum amount of game media that can be bet at that time is bet, and the second credit insertion button 48 or the second credit insertion button 48 or the first 3 When the credit insertion button 49 is operated, the bet state corresponding to the operation is set. In this case, when a virtual medal is used for the bet, the value corresponding to the number of the bet virtual medal is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, if the number of virtual medals required to set the number of bets corresponding to the operated credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is not stored and stored, it is possible to bet in relation to the stored and stored virtual medals. The maximum amount of game media is bet.

In the start waiting process, when the number of bets is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number and the value of the credit counter of the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit storage number (specifically, "50"), the acceptance prohibition process is executed. In the reception prohibition process, the selector 52 is set to the reception prohibition state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. On the other hand, if the number of bets is less than the maximum specified number or the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit storage number, the acceptance permission process is executed. In the reception permission process, the selector 52 is set to the reception permission state by starting the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. As a result, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 51 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not executed, medals corresponding to the total number of bets and credit counter values are issued via the medal ejection port 58. The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the medal tray 59 is ejected. As a result, the internally stored game medium is paid out to the player as an actual medal.

After executing the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached the specified number (“3” in the present embodiment) (step 303), and the number of bets has not reached the specified number. Return to the start waiting process (step S302). When the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, after activating the main line ML, the reception prohibition process already described is executed (step S305). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. After that, the lottery process for drawing the winning combination in this game is executed (step S306), the reel rotation process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed (step S307), and the stop buttons 42 to A reel stop process for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the case where the 44 is operated and a stop command is generated is performed (step S308).

After that, the medal payout process is executed (step S309). In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a player a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when granting a virtual medal, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the credit counter, and if the value of the credit counter reaches the maximum storage number, the maximum storage number is exceeded. The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that only a few minutes of medals are paid out to the medal tray 59.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Then, the reception permission process already described is executed (step S311). As a result, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

The lottery process executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a random number used when determining whether or not a combination is correct is acquired (step S401). In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, the lottery table for determining the winning or losing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S402). Here, in the slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities are prepared in advance from the set value of "1" to the set value of "6", and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 to perform an ON operation. By performing a predetermined operation together with the above, it is possible to set which winning probability the lottery process is to be executed based on. Since the setting value of "n + 1" has a higher probability of winning the first BB combination and the second BB combination that trigger the transition to the BB state than the setting value of "n", the setting value of "n" is higher than the setting value of "n". The set value of "n + 1" is more advantageous for the player. Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72 even if the set values are set at the same stage: a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode. Further, as a game state, a BB state exists in addition to the states of each of these lottery modes. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-BB state will be described by taking the case of the set value of "3" as an example. First, the lottery table for the normal mode selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 12 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 11, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for the normal mode, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

Specifically, the bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data are set at the index value IV = 1. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop (the reel on which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 32L, the second stop target and the third stop target The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the type of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first supplementary prize is surely generated.

In the slot machine 10, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated until a predetermined time (190 msec) elapses. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the unwinning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is formed in one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event is also called "missing"). Say). The 1st to 3rd supplementary prizes, the bell prizes, and various replay prizes are the prize modes in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, and the watermelon prize, the cherry prize, and the first prize are not missed. The 1BB prize and the second BB prize are prize modes in which omission may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

As shown in FIG. 11, the index value IV = 2 is set to the bell winning data and the second supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 11, the index value IV = 3 is set to the bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 11, only the watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 12, the watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 11, the index value IV = 5 is set with watermelon winning data and first supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 12, a watermelon prize or a first supplementary prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the establishment of the watermelon prize has priority over the establishment of the first supplementary prize. That is, when the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are the timings at which the watermelon prize can be established, the watermelon prize is established, and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44 cannot establish the watermelon prize. The first supplementary prize is established when the timing is such that the first supplementary prize can be established. Depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, both the watermelon prize and the first supplementary prize may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 11, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 12, the cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, the cherry winning may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 11, the index value IV = 7 is set with the first BB winning data. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 12, the first BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first BB prize will not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the second BB winning data is set at the index value IV = 8. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 12, the second BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second BB prize will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established, and are retained in the subsequent games of the winning game. Not over. On the other hand, in the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data, the corresponding BB prize is established even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game, except when the main RAM 74 is cleared. Is stored until. In this case, in the game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored even though the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored in the memory, and a plurality of BB winning data are accumulated. It is possible to prevent it from being memorized.

As shown in FIG. 11, the index values IV = 9 to 12 are set to the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data. In this case, when winning with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, and the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command is issued) is the left reel 32L. When the third stop (the reel on which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases. The normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 10, each stop button 42 to 42 when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the lottery table for the normal mode shown in FIG. 11 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 3 are selected. The probabilities of winning are about 1 / 5.0, respectively, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 are each about 1/100. , The probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 is about 1/423, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 8 are respectively. It is about 1/218, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11, and the index value IV. The probability of winning when = 12 is about 1 / 28.0, respectively.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as described above, the first RT replay winning data is set as the winning data having the index value IV = 9 to 12 in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 11). The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is about 1 / 7.0. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are won with any of the index values IV = 9 to 12, the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the first RT mode will be described. 13 and 14 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 13, the winning combination data set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. It is the same as 11). In this case, the winning combination data and each winning probability set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are set to the winning combination that enables the game medium to be assigned to the index values IV = 1 to 6. By being the same, the types of combinations that enable the addition of the game medium and the winning probabilities of those combinations are the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, the index values IV = 7 to 8 are set with BB winning data as in the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning either BB combination in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV = 9 is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 13, as the winning data of the index value IV = 9 to 12, the second RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is about 1 / 10.1. When winning with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second RT replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the index value IV = 10 is won, the second RT replay prize is won when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 11, the second RT replay prize is won when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the index value IV = 12 is won, the second RT replay prize is won when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In the 1st RT mode, any of the index values IV = 9 to 12 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. In that case, the second RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 13, as the winning data of the index value IV = 13 to 18, the first falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 13 to 18 is about 1 / 10.9.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode is won with an index value IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 14, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize is at the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It definitely occurs regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 14, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 15, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 16, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 17, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 18, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When the mode shifts to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) becomes the lottery table for the normal mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 19. The probability of winning at an index value IV = 19 is set higher than the probability of winning another combination, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 6.7. Then, when the winning is achieved with this index value IV = 19, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. ..

The lottery table for the first RT mode is set with an index value IV = 9 to 19 to enable the establishment of a replay prize. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probabilities) that enable the establishment of the replay winning in the first RT mode are about 1. It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the first RT mode is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the second RT mode will be described. 15 and 16 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 15, the winning combination data set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are set in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) and the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 13) are the same. In this case, the winning combination data and each winning probability set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are set to the winning combination that enables the game medium to be assigned to the index values IV = 1 to 6. By being the same, the types of combinations that enable the addition of the game medium and the winning probabilities of those combinations are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Further, the index value IV = 7 to 8 is set with BB winning data as in the normal mode lottery table and the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the normal mode lottery table and the 1st RT mode lottery. It is the same as the table. That is, the probability of winning any BB combination in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV = 9 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 15, as the winning data of the index value IV = 9 to 14, the second falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. .. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 14 is about 1 / 5.5.

When the lottery table for the second RT mode is won with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 32R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is at the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It definitely occurs regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 11, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 13, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 14, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 15. The probability of winning at an index value IV = 15 is set higher than the probability of winning another combination, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 6.3. Then, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 15, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, a combination that enables the establishment of a replay prize at an index value IV = 9 to 15 is set. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probabilities) that enable the establishment of the replay winning in the second RT mode are about 1. It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the second RT mode is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1 / 2.9. That is, the replay probability of the second RT mode is the same as that of the first RT mode. However, the replay probability in the first RT mode is not limited to the same configuration as the replay probability in the second RT mode. For example, although the replay probabilities are slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode, they are substantially the same. A certain configuration may be used, the second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, and the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

The lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the set value is high. The winning probability of the BB combination becomes higher as the winning probability increases, but the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of the set value. In addition, if any of the BB combinations is won, the first BB combination and the second BB will not be won in duplicate in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. The role is excluded from the lottery.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 includes a BB lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the BB state. It is remembered. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for BB.

In the BB lottery table, as shown in FIG. 17, only the bell winning data is set for the index value IV = 1. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, the bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Only watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 2. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2, the watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the watermelon winning may not be established.

Watermelon winning data and first supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 3. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 3, the watermelon prize or the first supplementary prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the establishment of the watermelon prize has priority over the establishment of the first supplementary prize. That is, when the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are the timings at which the watermelon prize can be established, the watermelon prize is established, and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44 cannot establish the watermelon prize. The first supplementary prize is established when the timing is such that the first supplementary prize can be established. Depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, both the watermelon prize and the first supplementary prize may not be established.

Only cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, the cherry prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, the cherry winning may not be established. Only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 5. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 5, the normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the lottery table for BB is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1 is about 1 / 1.3, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2 is about 1/100. Yes, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 3 is about 1/22, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is about 1/423, and when the index value IV = 5 The probability of winning is about 1 / 5.6. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number is higher than in other game states.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 10), after selecting the lottery table (step S402), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S403), and the determination value DV used when determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is set. (Step S404). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random value acquired in step S401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV “1” is added to this random value. Let it be a new judgment value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV (step S405). In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535", the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S406). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the index value IV this time in the lottery table to be referred to is set in the main RAM 74. In the state where the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the BB winning data, "0" is cleared after the end of this game regardless of whether or not the winning data corresponding to the winning data is established, and the BB is set. If it is winning data, "0" is cleared when a prize is established.

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 (step S407), and it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S404 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S404, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S405, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S406 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S408, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the effect content determination process is executed (step S409). In the effect content determination process, a process for determining the outline content of the effect to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in this game is executed. As the contents of the outline, high expectation content, medium expectation content, and low expectation content are set so that the expectation that the BB state or the AT state described later will occur gradually decreases. In the process of determining the content of the production, the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the condition of whether or not to shift to the AT state within the predetermined number of games and the condition of the winning combination in this game is used for the production. The contents of the outline will be decided by lottery.

Information corresponding to the outline of the contents determined in the effect content determination process is set in the game start command, and the game start command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S410). The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 82 to recognize that a new game has started, and for causing the production side MPU 82 to recognize the outline contents of the production determined by the main side MPU 72. It is a command and is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When the production side MPU 82 receives the game start command, it grasps the outline contents of the production in this game from the game start command, and displays the details of the production in an manner corresponding to the grasped outline contents of the production. Determined by lottery. Then, the data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 83 to the effect side RAM 84, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Take control.

After that, the notification control process is executed (step S411). In the notification control process, when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won in the non-BB state and the AT state (or ART state), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the bell winning A process for executing a notification that makes the player aware of the stop order is executed. In addition, in the non-BB state and the AT state (or ART state), if the first RT replay winning data or the second RT replay winning data is set, the set RT replay winning can be established. A process is executed so that the notification for making the player aware of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be performed is executed. In addition, in the non-BB state and the AT state (or ART state), if the first fall replay winning data or the second fall replay winning data is set, the establishment of the set fall replay winning is avoided. A process is executed to enable the player to recognize the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The notification for making the player aware of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started before the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped in the corresponding game.

<Reel rotation processing>
Next, the reel rotation process of step S307 in the normal process (FIG. 9) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the winning data of the current game stored in the main RAM 74 is referred to, and the type of the offset designation table corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the current game is specified (step S501). The offset designation table is stored in advance in the main ROM 73. The offset designation table is a table in which various setting information for setting stop information used when stopping the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is defined.

After that, basic information is set (step S502). Specifically, the address information in the main ROM 73 of the pull-in bit table set in the offset designation table is set in the main RAM 74, and the virtual payout upper limit value information is set in the main RAM 74.

After that, start interrupt processing is permitted (step S503). The start interrupt process is included in the stepping motor control process in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8). By performing the process in step S503 in the reel rotation process, a series of processes in the stepping motor control process are performed. The start interrupt processing is started as a part of. Since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 1.49 msec, the start interrupt process is also started at a cycle of about 1.49 msec while the start interrupt process is permitted.

In the start interrupt processing, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started in the previous game. Start the rotation. Then, the acceleration processing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in a predetermined acceleration mode, and when the acceleration processing is completed and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed rotation, the constant speed rotation information is sent to the main side. Set in RAM 74.

When the start interrupt process is permitted, the stop preparation process for setting the stop information of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S504). After that, it is determined whether or not the constant speed rotation information is set in the main RAM 74, and the process waits in step S505 until the constant speed rotation information is set. When the constant speed rotation information is set, the execution of the start interrupt process is prohibited, and the constant speed rotation information of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S506).

Next, the stop preparation process will be described. The stop preparation process is executed in step S504 in the reel rotation process (FIG. 18) as described above. In addition to that, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R subject to the stop command are stopped based on the occurrence of a stop command for any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the reel stop process (FIG. 25) described later. It is executed in the situation where the process for making the reel is executed. That is, the stop preparation process is executed by using the period required for the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to reach a constant speed after a new game is started, and the rotating reels 32L, 32M, It is executed by using the period for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop command based on the occurrence of the stop command for the 32R.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a stop preparation process. First, information indicating the right reel 32R is stored in the main RAM 74 as target reel information (step S601). After that, it is determined whether or not a stop command has already been generated for the reel indicated by the target reel information (hereinafter, referred to as “target reel”) (step S602). When the stop command has not been generated, the stop information setting process for setting the information for determining the symbol to be stopped at the base point position for the current target reel is executed (step S603). After that, it is determined whether or not the current target reel is the left reel 32L (step S604). If the target reel is not the left reel 32L, the target reel information is updated (step S605). Specifically, when the right reel 32R is the target reel, the target reel is updated to the middle reel 32M, and when the middle reel 32M is the target reel, the target reel is updated to the left reel 32L. When the target reel information is updated, the process returns to step S602 to set the stop information of the target reel.

That is, in the stop preparation process, a process for setting stop information is performed in the order of right reel 32R → middle reel 32M → left reel 32L. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S604 that the target reel is the left reel 32L, it means that the stop information of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been set, so the stop preparation process is terminated. Here, as described above, the stop preparation process is executed during the acceleration period of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and during the period during which the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In this case, the process of step S603 is executed for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during the acceleration period, and the stop command has not yet been generated during the period during which the stop control is being performed1. The process of step S603 is executed for the one or two reels.

Next, the stop information setting process in step S603 in the stop preparation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a stop command is generated for one rotating reel 32L, 32M, 32R among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and a stop command is issued for the remaining two rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Is not generated, and in step S702, a stop command is generated for two reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are rotating among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the reels are rotating. It is determined whether or not a stop command has been generated for the remaining one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, the first post-stop processing is executed in step S703, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the second post-stop processing is executed in step S704. In these first post-stop processing and the second post-stop processing, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued (the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are stopped and the stop command is generated while rotating. Depending on the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R) being used, a process for changing a stop control table such as a pull-in bit table to be used is executed thereafter. When the process of step S703 is executed, the process of step S704 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S702, the priority information creation process is executed (step S705).

The priority information creation process will be described. In the priority information creation process, priority information is created based on the stop positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop command is generated, the winning status of the winning combination, and the like. When creating this priority information, the priority information area 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is used.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the priority information area 74a.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the priority information area 74a includes a large number of determination information buffers B. The determination information buffer B is provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with each symbol number of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, since a symbol is set for each symbol number of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, it can be said that the determination information buffer B is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each symbol. Since 20 determination information buffers B are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the priority information area 74a has a total of 60 determination information buffers B. Each determination information buffer B is composed of 1 byte, and the priority information area 74a has a total data capacity of 60 bytes.

Each bit of the determination information buffer B has a function for storing specific determination information individually or in a predetermined combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, the uppermost 7th bit has a function as an unfair winning determination bit for storing the unfair winning information, and the 6th to 3rd bits are regenerated. It has a function as a re-game bit for storing game information and a re-game bit for storing acquired number information, and the second bit is a re-game bit for storing re-game information and an accessory. It has a function as an accessory bit for storing information, and the first to 0th bits have a function as a pull-in bit for storing pull-in bit information. In the comparison determination process described later, the magnitude of the priority information formed by the value of each bit of the determination information buffer B is compared and determined, and the stop symbol number is derived based on the largest priority information. Therefore, the priority information becomes the priority when the symbol is stopped, the symbol number having the larger priority information has a higher priority to stop at the base point position, and the symbol number with the smaller priority information stops at the base point position. The priority is low.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the priority information creation process. First, the buffer address for determination information of the target reel is acquired (step S801). That is, it is specified which of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the target reel set this time in the stop preparation process (FIG. 19), and the number of symbols corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ( 20) The addresses of the determination information buffers B are acquired. Then, an initialization process for initializing the data in each determination information buffer B corresponding to those addresses is executed (step S802). In the initialization process, basically, "1" is set in the 7th bit which is the unjust winning judgment bit and the 0th bit which is the lower side of the pull-in bit, and the other bits are "0". To do.

After that, the data of the main RAM 74 is written so that the target symbol number of this time is "20" (step S803). Then, the value of the target symbol number written in the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S804).

After that, the winning determination process is executed (step S805). As a result, priority information is created for the current target reel and the current target symbol number. When creating the priority information, it is assumed that the target symbol number of the target reel stops at the base point position, and various situations are taken into consideration for each bit of the judgment information buffer B corresponding to the target symbol number. Performs a process of storing the information of "0" or "1".

After that, it is determined whether or not the target symbol number written in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S806). If it is not "0", the process returns to step S804, the target symbol number of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1, and priority information is created for the target symbol number. That is, in the priority information creation process, it is assumed that each symbol number from 19 to 0 stops at the base point position, and priority information is created in order for these symbol numbers. Then, when it is determined in step S806 that the value of the target symbol number of the main RAM 74 is "0", it means that priority information has been created for all the symbol numbers of the target reel, so that priority is given. The ranking information creation process is terminated.

The winning determination process executed in step S805 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the line determination process is executed (step S901). In the line determination process, when the stop command has already been issued, the symbol number on the main line ML is specified for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has already been issued. In addition, the symbol number on the main line ML is specified for the target reel this time. Then, the type of the symbol or the combination of symbols existing on the main line ML is specified based on the identified symbol numbers.

When the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued is 0, it is assumed that the target symbol number of this time is stopped at the base point position on the target reel of this time, and the main reel is main. It is specified whether or not the symbol corresponding to the symbol number existing on the line ML is the symbol corresponding to the winning combination, or whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination may be established. The case where the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has already been generated is 0 as described above occurs when the stop preparation process of step S504 in the reel rotation process (FIG. 18) is executed.

When there is one reel 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, a stop command has already been issued assuming that the target symbol number of this time has stopped at the base point position on the target reel of this time. Whether or not the symbol corresponding to each symbol number existing on the main line ML in each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the target reel of this time is the symbol corresponding to the winning combination, or the symbol corresponding to the winning combination. Identify whether or not there is a possibility that the combination of. In this way, when there is one reel 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, the reel stop processing is performed in a situation where a stop command is generated for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R (FIG. It occurs when 25) is executed.

When there are two reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued, a stop command has already been issued assuming that the target symbol number of this time has stopped at the base point position on the target reel of this time. Whether or not the symbol corresponding to each symbol number existing on the main line ML in each of the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the target reel of this time is the symbol corresponding to the winning combination, or the winning combination Identify whether or not there is a possibility that the corresponding symbol combination will be established. When the line determination process is executed when there are two reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has already been issued in this way, one reel 32L, 32M, 32R has already stopped and the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R have already stopped. It occurs when the reel stop processing (FIG. 25) is executed in the situation where the stop command is generated for one reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

After that, the unjust prize determination process is executed (step S902). Here, the unjust prize means that the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination that is the target of the lottery stops on the main line ML even though the winning combination is not won. Then, in the unjustice winning determination process, the priority information is created so that the symbol number in which the unjustice is generated is surely smaller than the symbol number in which the unjustice is not generated. Specifically, all the bits of the determination information buffer B corresponding to the target symbol number of this time are cleared to "0". If an unjust prize is generated, the processing after step S903 is not executed for the target symbol number this time.

After executing the unjust prize determination process (step S902), on condition that a stop command has already been issued to the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S903: YES), for avoiding the combination of 0 cards. The process is executed (step S904). In this slot machine 10, the 0-card combination is not a combination selected in the lottery process (FIG. 10), but stops each stop button 42 to 44 in a situation where the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is set. If it is not possible to establish a BB prize corresponding to the winning combination due to the timing, a combination of symbols (so-called reach) is used to clearly indicate that one of the BB winning data is set instead. It refers to the stop mode to be displayed. When it corresponds to the establishment of the 0-card combination, only the unjust winning judgment bit of the judgment information buffer B corresponding to the target symbol number of this time is cleared to "0". As a result, the priority information that causes the so-called reach eyes to appear in the situation where the BB winning data is not set is made smaller than the priority information that does not cause both the so-called reach eyes to appear at the time of unjust prize and BB non-winning. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the symbol number that causes the so-called reach eye to appear at the base point position on the target reel when the BB is not won, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the so-called reach eye when the BB is not won.

If a negative determination is made in step S903 or the process of step S904 is executed, the process at the time of winning is executed on condition that one of the winning combinations is won in this game (step S905: YES). (Step S906). FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the winning process.

First, the winning symbol establishment determination process is executed (step S1001). In the winning symbol establishment determination process, it is determined whether or not the symbol number specified to exist on the main line ML matches the winning combination in the lottery process (FIG. 10) in this game. As a result of the winning symbol establishment determination process, when it is determined that a symbol exists on the main line ML so as to enable any re-game winning (step S1002: YES), the determination information of the target symbol number this time “1” is set in the replay bit in the buffer B (step S1003). As described above, in the determination information buffer B in the slot machine 10, the sixth to third bits have functions as the replay bit and the acquired number bit, and the second bit serves as the replay bit and the accessory bit. It has a function (see FIG. 21). Therefore, in step S1003, "1" is stored in the 6th to 2nd bits of the determination information buffer B.

When it is determined that a symbol exists on the main line ML so as to enable any BB winning as a result of the winning symbol establishment determination process (step S1004: YES), it is used for the determination information of the target symbol number this time. “1” is set in the accessory bit in the buffer B (step S1005). As described above, in the determination information buffer B in the slot machine 10, the second bit has a function as a replay bit and a bonus bit (see FIG. 21). Therefore, in step S1005, "1" is stored in the second bit of the determination information buffer B.

As a result of the winning symbol establishment determination process, when it is determined that a symbol exists on the main line ML so as to enable any small winning combination (step S1006: YES), the corresponding small winning combination is established. The number of medals to be paid out is read from the main ROM 73, and the read number of medals to be paid out is added to the acquired number area provided in the main RAM 74.

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (FIG. 23), when a negative determination is made in step S905 or the process of step S906 is executed, the acquired number setting process is executed (step S907). In the acquired number setting process, the payout number information stored in the acquired number area of the main RAM 74 is compared with the virtual payout upper limit information set in the offset designation table specified in this game, and the payout number information is obtained. Determines whether is equal to or greater than the virtual payout limit information. When the payout number information is smaller than the virtual payout upper limit information, the payout number information is stored in the acquired number bits (6th bit to 3rd bit) of the determination information buffer B in the target symbol number this time. When the payout number information is equal to or larger than the virtual payout upper limit information, the virtual payout upper limit information is set to the acquired number bit (6th bit to 3rd bit) of the determination information buffer B in the target symbol number this time. Store.

For example, in a game in which the index value IV = 1 is won in the non-BB state, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the virtual payout upper limit information is "9" which is the number of payouts at the time of winning the bell. If the number is set to "15", which is larger than the number, and the first stop is other than the left reel 32L, the virtual payout upper limit information is the same "1" as the number of payouts at the time of the first compensation prize. Is set to. As a result, when the left reel 32L is first stopped, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell prize is set to a value larger than the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the first supplementary prize. This makes it possible to set the priority determination value of the symbol that establishes the bell prize to a larger value than the symbol that finally establishes the first supplementary prize. On the other hand, when the first stop is performed on a reel other than the left reel 32L, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell prize and the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the first supplementary prize shall be the same. Is possible. In this case, due to the setting of the pull-in bit value described later, when the first stop is performed on a symbol other than the left reel 32L, the priority determination value of the symbol that establishes the first supplementary prize is larger than the symbol that establishes the bell prize. It becomes possible to.

In a game in which the index value IV = 2 is won in the non-BB state, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the virtual payout upper limit information is from "9" which is the number of payouts at the time of winning the bell. Is set to "15", which is a large number, and if the first stop is other than the middle reel 32M, the virtual payout upper limit information will be "1", which is the same as the number of payouts at the time of the second compensation prize. It is set. As a result, when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell prize is set to a value larger than the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the second supplementary prize. This makes it possible to set the priority determination value of the symbol that establishes the bell prize to a larger value than the symbol that finally establishes the second supplementary prize. On the other hand, when the first stop is performed on a reel other than the middle reel 32M, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell prize and the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the first supplementary prize shall be the same. Is possible. In this case, due to the setting of the pull-in bit value described later, when the first stop is performed on a symbol other than the middle reel 32M, the priority determination value of the symbol that establishes the second supplementary prize is larger than the symbol that establishes the bell prize. It becomes possible to.

In a game in which the index value IV = 3 is won in the non-BB state, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the virtual payout upper limit information is from "9" which is the number of payouts at the time of winning the bell. Is set to "15", which is a large number, and if the first stop is other than the right reel 32R, the virtual payout upper limit information will be "1", which is the same as the number of payouts at the time of the third compensation prize. It is set. As a result, when the right reel 32R is first stopped, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell prize is set to a value larger than the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the third supplementary prize. This makes it possible to set the priority determination value of the symbol that establishes the bell prize to a larger value than the symbol that finally establishes the third supplementary prize. On the other hand, when the first stop is performed on a reel other than the right reel 32R, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the bell prize and the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the third supplementary prize shall be the same. Is possible. In this case, due to the setting of the pull-in bit value described later, when the first stop other than the right reel 32R is performed, the priority determination value of the symbol that establishes the third supplementary prize is set to a larger value than the symbol that establishes the bell prize. It becomes possible to.

In a game in which the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state, the virtual payout upper limit information is larger than the payout number "7" at the time of watermelon winning regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is set to a large number, "15". As a result, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the watermelon prize is set to a value larger than the value of the acquired number bit of the symbol that establishes the first supplementary prize. This makes it possible to make the priority determination value of the symbol that establishes the watermelon prize larger than the symbol that finally establishes the first supplementary prize.

After executing the acquisition number number setting process in step S907, the pull-in bit setting process is executed (step S908). In the pull-in bit setting process, a process for setting the pull-in bits (1st bit to 0th bit) of the determination information buffer B is executed by using the pull-in bit table. As a result, in a situation where so-called omission occurs, in a situation where no winning combination is won, or in a situation where a plurality of types of winning data in which the same acquired number bit has the same value are set at the same time, a predetermined value It is possible to set the stop mode to a larger value in the priority information than the other stop modes.

<Reel stop processing>
Next, the reel stop process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 9) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to generate a stop command for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and if the stop command is not generated, a stop command is generated. Wait until. When the stop command is generated, the slip number acquisition process is executed (step S1102). FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the slip number acquisition process.

In the slip number acquisition process, first, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop command this time are specified (step S1201). Then, the arrival symbol numbers of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped when the stop command is received are acquired (step S1202). The arrival symbol number is a symbol number of a symbol that has reached the base point position (actually, the lower row) when a stop command is received for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Further, "0" is stored in the sliding number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1203).

After that, the determination symbol number is acquired by adding the value of the slip number counter to the reached symbol number (step S1204). When the value of the slip number counter is "0", the determination symbol number = the reached symbol number. In addition, the determination information buffer B corresponding to the determination symbol number is acquired (step S1205). Then, the priority determination value of the acquired determination information buffer B is calculated (step S1206). The priority judgment value is a judgment value calculated by arranging each bit of the judgment information buffer B from the upper side and converting a numerical value assumed as an 8-digit binary number into an octal number, and is "0 to 8". Is represented by an octal number (0 is the smallest and 8 is the largest). Therefore, the higher the "1" is stored in the high-order bit, the larger the priority determination value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the priority determination value calculated in step S1206 is larger than the priority determination value calculated last time (step S1207). If this time is larger, the value of the current slip count counter is stored in the set slip count buffer provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1208).

When a negative determination is made in step S1207, or when the process of step S1208 is executed, the slip count counter is incremented by 1 (step S1209). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the slip counter is "5" (step S1210). If the value of the slip counter is not "5", the process returns to step S1204.

That is, in the slip number acquisition process, five priority determination values from the arrival symbol number to the symbol number whose symbol number is four higher than the arrival symbol number are calculated and compared, and the highest priority determination value among them is obtained. Specify the number of slips so that the symbol with the symbol number with a large number becomes the stop symbol at the base point position. Here, the priority determination value from the arrival symbol number to the symbol whose symbol number is four higher than the arrival symbol number is calculated in order to make it possible to slide up to four symbols. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of so-called omissions in which the winning combination and the corresponding symbol or combination of symbols do not stop on the effective line, and the winning symbol even though the winning combination has not been won. It is possible to avoid the problem that the combination of is stopped on the effective line.

Returning to the description of the reel stop process (FIG. 25), after executing the slide number acquisition process in step S1102, the stop position setting process is executed (step S1103). In the stop position setting process, the number of slips is acquired by referring to the buffer for the number of set slips. Then, the stop symbol number is calculated by adding the slip number to the reached symbol number, and the calculated stop symbol number information is stored in the stop position buffer provided in the main RAM 74 as the stop position information. ..

After that, stop interrupt processing is permitted (step S1104). The stop interrupt process is executed by the stepping motor control process in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) described above. In the stop interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the symbol with the stop symbol number set in the previous stop position setting process has reached the base point position, and if the symbol has arrived, the deceleration process is started. Then, the symbol is stopped at the base point position. Since the stop interrupt process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process, the stop interrupt process is executed a plurality of times before the symbol is stopped at the base point position.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stop command this time is for stopping the last reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the current stop command is the first stop command or the next stop command, the priority information creation process is executed (step S1106). The processing content of the priority information creation process is as described above (see FIG. 22).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, or after the process of step S1106 is executed, it is determined whether or not the stops of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop command are completed (step S1107). .. If it is not completed, it waits in step S1107. If it is completed, stop interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1108).

After that, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped (step S1109). If the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not stopped, the process returns to step S1101, and if the rotation is stopped, the payout determination process is executed (step S1110). In the payout determination process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the main line ML. Then, if any of the replay prizes is established, the privilege of the re-game is given, and if any of the prizes corresponding to the grant of the game medium is established, the prize is dealt with. Make settings so that a number of game media are given.

<Correspondence processing at the end of the game>
Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S310 of the normal processing (FIG. 9) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, when any of the BB winning data is set or the BB state (step S1301: YES), the BB process is executed (step S1302). In the BB processing, if any BB winning data is set, it is determined whether or not a BB winning has occurred in this game, and if a BB winning has occurred, the main RAM 74 is used. By setting "1" to the provided BB state flag, the game state is shifted to the BB state. As a result, the BB lottery table (FIG. 17) will be referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the next and subsequent games. Further, by transmitting a command indicating the transition to the BB state to the effect side MPU 82, the effect for the BB state is started in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In addition, when the state is shifted to the BB state, the BB winning state is released by erasing the BB winning data from the main RAM 74.

If it is in the BB state, the BB state process is executed as the BB state process. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the BB state processing. If the game is won with an index value IV = 2 or 4 in the BB lottery table (FIG. 17) (step S1401: YES), the advantageous lottery process is executed (step S1402). Only the watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 2 in the BB lottery table as described above, and only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 2 wins, the watermelon prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and even if the index value IV = 4 wins, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, the cherry winning may not be established, but even if the corresponding winning is not established, if the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2 or 4, the advantageous lottery process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous lottery process may be executed on the condition that the corresponding winning prize is established.

In the advantageous lottery process, the advantageous lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 2 and 4 is read from the main ROM 73, and the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 74. The value of the lottery counter is collated with the read-out advantageous lottery table. In the advantageous lottery table, if the index value IV = 2 wins, the probability of winning is 1/2, and if the index value IV = 4 wins, the probability of winning is 4/5. Become.

The advantageous lottery table is provided as one type of table common to the set values "1" to "6" of the slot machine 10. That is, the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 2 in the BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 4 in the BB state is common. Is common to all settings. Further, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 2 in the BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the BB state is also common to all settings. Therefore, the probability of winning an advantage in the BB state is common to all settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the probability of winning an advantage in the BB state. Further, as the advantageous lottery table, only one type of table common to all settings needs to be stored in the main ROM 73 for each of the index values IV = 2 and 4, so that the advantageous lottery table is stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the capacity.

When an advantageous lottery process results in an advantageous win (step S1403: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the AT status counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1404). The AT state counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the main MPU 72 is in the AT state, and if it is in the AT state, specifying the stay mode in the AT state. In the non-AT state, the value of the AT state counter is "0", and in the AT state, the value of the AT state counter is 1 or more.

When the value of the AT status counter is "0" (step S1404: NO), "1" is set in the BB middle transition winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1405). The BB middle transition winning flag specifies in the main MPU 72 that it is necessary to shift to the AT state after the end of the BB state, triggered by the advantageous winning in the BB state that has transitioned in the non-AT state. It is a flag to do. That is, if an advantageous lottery process in the BB state that has transitioned to a state other than the AT state results in an advantageous winning, the state shifts to the AT state after the end of the BB state.

When the value of the AT status counter is 1 or more (step S1404: YES), "50" is added as the number of games added to the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1406). The ART game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games per execution in the ART state by the main MPU 72. That is, if an advantageous lottery process in the BB state that has shifted to the AT state results in an advantageous winning, the number of continuous games per execution in the ART state will increase.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, a negative determination is made in step S1403, the process of step S1405 is executed, or the process of step S1406 is executed, the game medium is given in this game. On the condition that (step S1407: YES), the subtraction process of the BB counter provided in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1408). The BB counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the total number of game media given since the start of the BB state has exceeded the end reference number. When the BB state is started, the end reference number "350" is set in the BB counter. In the subtraction process of the BB counter, the number of game media given in this game is subtracted from the value of the BB counter.

When the value of the BB counter after subtraction is "0" (step S1409: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the BB middle transition winning flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the AT transition winning has occurred in the BB state (step S1410). When "1" is set in the BB middle transition winning flag, after clearing the BB middle transition winning flag "0", the initial continuous game number setting process is executed (step S1411), and the main RAM 74 is set. “1” is set in the provided AT status counter (step S1412). In the process of setting the number of initial continuous games, "50" is set as the initial number of continuous games in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

When a negative determination is made in step S1410, or when the process of step S1412 is executed, the BB end process is executed (step S1413). In the BB end process, the BB state is ended by clearing the BB state flag of the main RAM 74 to "0". Further, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the effect side MPU 82, the effect for the BB state in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is terminated. When the BB state ends, the lottery mode becomes the normal mode regardless of which mode the lottery mode is before the start of the BB state. Further, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparation state process (step S1308) described later is executed after the end of the BB state regardless of the state before the start of the BB state.

Returning to the explanation of the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 27), when neither the winning state of the BB nor the BB state (step S1301: NO) and the AT state (step S1303: NO), the RT mode is changed. The process (step S1304), the game number release management process (step S1305), and the transition chance management process (step S1306) are executed. Even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first in a game in neither the BB state nor the AT state, no penalty is given to limit the granting of profits in the subsequent games.

In the RT mode transition process (step S1304), when it is specified that the first RT replay prize has occurred in this game, the game shifts to the first RT mode, and the second RT replay prize occurs in this game. If it is specified that the game is present, the mode shifts to the second RT mode. In addition, in the RT mode transition process, if it is specified that the second fall replay prize has occurred in this game, the game is shifted to the first RT mode, and the first fall replay prize is generated in this game. If it is specified that it is, the mode is changed to the normal mode.

In the game number release management process (step S1305), the game shifts to the AT state when the number of games set when the AT state ends last time is digested without a new shift to the AT state. Execute the process to make it. That is, each time one game ends, the value of the number of released games is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the remaining number of released games becomes "0", "1" is set in the AT status counter of the main RAM 74. .. As a result, in the next processing round in the corresponding processing at the end of the game, the ART preparation state processing (step S1308) described later will be executed.

The transition chance management process (step S1306) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. If the game is won with an index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-BB state (step S1501: YES), the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed (step S1502). Only the watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 4 wins, the watermelon prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and even if the index value IV = 6 wins, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, the cherry prize may not be established, but even if the corresponding prize is not established, if the index value IV = 4 or 6 is won, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed. Will be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process for shifting to the AT state may be executed on the condition that the corresponding winning prize is established.

Here, as described above, in the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 2 or 4 is won, but the index value IV = 2 in the BB state is the non-BB state. Only the watermelon winning data is set as in the index value IV = 4 in the BB state, and only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 in the BB state as in the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state. .. That is, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state and the winning combination that triggers the execution of the transition lottery process in the AT state in the non-BB state are common. As a result, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process and the lottery process for shifting to the AT state becomes clear to the player.

In the shift lottery process to the AT state, the AT shift lottery table in the non-BB corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 and 6 is read from the main ROM 73, and is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the main RAM 74. The value of the lottery counter is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the read-out AT transition lottery table in the non-BB. In the non-BB AT transition lottery table, if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 1/2 probability that the AT transition is won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, 4/5. There is a probability of winning the AT transition.

The AT transition lottery table in the non-BB is provided as one kind of table common to the set values "1" to "6" of the slot machine 10. That is, the probability of winning the AT transition when the index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the AT transition is made when the index value IV = 6 is won in the non-BB state. The probability of winning is also common to all settings. Further, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is also common to all settings. Therefore, the probability of winning the AT transition in the non-BB state is common to all settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the probability of winning the AT transition in the non-BB state. Further, as the AT transition lottery table in non-BB, only one type of table common to all settings for each of the index values IV = 4 and 6 needs to be stored in the main ROM 73, so that the AT in non-BB It is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the transfer lottery table in advance.

The probability of winning at an index value IV = 2 where only watermelon winning data is set in the BB state is the same as the probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 where only watermelon winning data is set in the non-BB state. At the same time, the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process triggered by winning with an index value of IV = 2 in the BB state, and the trigger of winning with an index value of IV = 4 in the non-BB state. As a result, the probability of winning a transition in the transition lottery process in the AT state is the same. Therefore, the probability that the index value IV in which only the watermelon winning data is set will be won and a profit different from the granting of the game medium will be granted is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state.

The probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 where only cherry winning data is set in the BB state is the same as the probability of winning at an index value IV = 6 where only cherry winning data is set in the non-BB state. At the same time, the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process triggered by winning with an index value of IV = 4 in the BB state, and the trigger of winning with an index value of IV = 6 in the non-BB state. As a result, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process in the AT state is the same. Therefore, the probability that the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set will be won and a profit different from the granting of the game medium will be granted is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state.

Furthermore, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state is the index values IV = 2 and 4 as already explained, and the winning combination that triggers the execution of the transition lottery process in the AT state in the non-BB state has already been performed. As explained, the index values IV = 4 and 6. Then, as described above, the probability that the index value IV in which only the watermelon winning data is set is won and a profit different from the grant of the game medium is given is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state, and the cherry is won. The probability of winning at the index value IV in which only the data is set and giving a profit different from the grant of the game medium is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state. Therefore, the probability that a profit different from the grant of the game medium will be granted when the small winning combination corresponding to the grant of the game medium is won is the same in the BB state and the non-BB state.

When the AT transition is won in the shift lottery process to the AT state (step S1503: YES), the initial continuous game number setting process is executed (step S1504), and the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Is set (step S1505). In the process of setting the number of initial continuous games, “50” is set as the initial number of continuous games in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 74, as in step S1411 in the BB state process (FIG. 28). Further, by setting "1" in the AT status counter, the ART preparation status process (step S1308) described later will be executed in the next processing round in the corresponding processing at the end of the game.

Returning to the explanation of the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 27), if the value of the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, it means that the AT status is in effect. The process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, the value of the AT status counter is grasped, and the process corresponding to the grasped value is executed. Specifically, if the value of the AT status counter is "1", the ART preparation status processing is executed (step S1308), and if the value of the AT status counter is "2", the ART status processing is executed (step S1309). ), If the value of the AT status counter is "3", the ART end branch processing is executed (step S1310). When the process of step S1302 is executed, the process of step S1306 is executed, or any of the processes of steps S1308 to S1310 is executed, the game end command is set as the transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step). S1311). The game end command is a command for causing the production side MPU 82 to recognize that one game has ended, and the command is transmitted to the production side MPU 82 in the command output processing (step S211) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8). To. Hereinafter, each process of steps S1308 to S1310 will be described.

First, the ART preparation state process (step S1308) will be described. The ART preparation state is a state in which, when the condition for transition to the ART state is satisfied, the user stays before the transition to the ART state. In the ART preparation state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is notified when the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 1 to 3. Further, in the ART preparation state, the winning is achieved by either the index value IV = 9 to 12 (hereinafter, also referred to as the promotion target combination) in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) or the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 13). In that case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize (hereinafter, also referred to as the stop order for promotion occurrence) is notified. In the transition to the ART state, in the situation where the ART preparation state process or the ART end branch process is being executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order for promotion occurrence after winning the promotion target combination in the 1st RT mode. It occurs when the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing ART preparation state processing. In the ART preparation state processing, when the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-BB state is won in this game (step S1601: YES), the additional lottery processing is executed (step S1602). Only the watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 4 wins, the watermelon prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and even if the index value IV = 6 wins, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, the cherry prize may not be established, but even if the corresponding prize is not established, if the index value IV = 4 or 6 is won, the additional lottery process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the additional lottery process may be executed on the condition that the corresponding winning prize is established.

Here, as described above, when the player wins at the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed. Further, as described above, in the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 2 or 4 is won, but the index value IV = 2 in the BB state is in the non-BB state. Only the watermelon winning data is set as in the index value IV = 4, and only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 in the BB state as in the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state. That is, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the transition lottery process of the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, and the AT state in the non-BB state. In common with the winning combination that triggers the execution of the additional lottery process. As a result, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process, the AT state transition lottery process, and the additional lottery process becomes clear to the player.

In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 and 6 is read from the main ROM 73, and the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 74. The value of the lottery counter is collated with the read-out additional lottery table. In the additional lottery table, if the index value IV = 4 is won, the additional winning is 1/2 probability, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, the additional winning is 4/5 probability. Become.

The additional lottery table is provided as one type of table common to the set values "1" to "6" of the slot machine 10. In other words, the probability of winning an additional prize when the index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the additional winning is obtained when the index value IV = 6 is won in the non-BB state. The probability of becoming is also common to all settings. Further, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is also common to all settings. Therefore, the probability of winning an additional prize in the non-BB state is common to all settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the probability of winning an additional prize in the non-BB state. Further, as the additional lottery table, only one type of table common to all settings needs to be stored in the main ROM 73 for each of the index values IV = 4 and 6, so that the additional lottery table is stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the capacity.

When the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S1603: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1604). As a result, the number of continuous games per execution of the ART state after the transition to the ART state is increased.

In the ART preparation state processing, when it is specified that the second RT replay winning has occurred in this game (step S1605: YES), "2" is set in the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1606). As a result, the main MPU 72 executes the ART state process (step S1309) at the next processing time in the corresponding process (FIG. 27) at the end of the game, and the game state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state. Further, in order to set the lottery mode to the second RT mode, the data of the main RAM 74 is set (step S1607). After that, on condition that the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1608: YES), the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 20 (step S1609). As a result, when the game shifts to the BB state when the number of remaining games in the ART state becomes "0", the BB state ends even if the addition to the ART game number counter does not occur in the BB state. Later, it is possible to ensure that the ART state is executed to some extent.

In the ART preparation state process, other RT mode transition processes are executed (step S1610). In other RT mode transition processes, if it is specified that the 1st RT replay winning has occurred, it is shifted to the 1st RT mode, and if it is specified that the 1st fall replay winning has occurred, it is shifted to the normal mode. , When it is specified that the second fall replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

Next, the ART state process (step S1309) in the corresponding process (FIG. 27) at the end of the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In the ART state processing, when the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-BB state is won in this game (step S1701: YES), the additional lottery processing is executed (step S1702). Only the watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 4 wins, the watermelon prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and even if the index value IV = 6 wins, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, the cherry prize may not be established, but even if the corresponding prize is not established, if the index value IV = 4 or 6 is won, the additional lottery process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the additional lottery process may be executed on the condition that the corresponding winning prize is established.

Here, as described above, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the ART preparation state, the additional lottery process is executed. Further, as described above, when the player wins the position with the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed. Further, as described above, in the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 2 or 4 is won, but the index value IV = 2 in the BB state is in the non-BB state. Only the watermelon winning data is set as in the index value IV = 4, and only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 in the BB state as in the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state. That is, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the transition lottery process of the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, and the AT state in the non-BB state. In common with the winning combination that triggers the execution of the additional lottery process. As a result, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process, the AT state transition lottery process, and the additional lottery process becomes clear to the player.

In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 and 6 is read from the main ROM 73, and the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 74. The value of the lottery counter is collated with the read-out additional lottery table. In the additional lottery table, if the index value IV = 4 is won, the additional winning is 1/2 probability, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, the additional winning is 4/5 probability. Become.

The additional lottery table is provided as one type of table common to the set values "1" to "6" of the slot machine 10. In other words, the probability of winning an additional prize when the index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the additional winning is obtained when the index value IV = 6 is won in the non-BB state. The probability of becoming is also common to all settings. Further, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is also common to all settings. Therefore, the probability of winning an additional prize in the non-BB state is common to all settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the probability of winning an additional prize in the non-BB state. Further, as the additional lottery table, only one type of table common to all settings needs to be stored in the main ROM 73 for each of the index values IV = 4 and 6, so that the additional lottery table is stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the capacity.

The additional lottery table to be read in step S1702 is the same as the additional lottery table to be read in step S1602 of the ART preparation state process (FIG. 30). In addition, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and non-AT state, and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state). The probability is the same, and the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process of the AT state and the non-BB state when the index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. Therefore, the probability of winning in the additional lottery process is the same as the probability of winning in the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) with the index value IV = 4. Therefore, in the non-BB state, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 and giving a profit different from the grant of the game medium is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

The additional lottery table to be read in step S1702 is the same as the additional lottery table to be read in step S1602 of the ART preparation state process (FIG. 30). In addition, the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 6 in the non-BB state and non-AT state, and the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 6 in the non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state). The probability is the same, and the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process of the AT state and the non-BB state when the index value IV = 6 is won in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. Therefore, the probability of winning in the additional lottery process is the same as the probability of winning in the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) with the index value IV = 6. Therefore, in the non-BB state, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 6 and giving a profit different from the grant of the game medium is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

Furthermore, the winning combination that triggers the execution of the transition lottery process of the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state has index values IV = 4 and 6 as described above, and is in the non-BB state and the AT state ( The winning combinations that trigger the execution of the additional lottery process in the ART preparation state and the ART state) are the index values IV = 4 and 6 as described above. Then, as described above, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 and giving a profit different from the grant of the game medium is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state), and the index. The probability of winning at a value IV = 6 and giving a profit different from the grant of the game medium is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state). Therefore, the probability that a profit different from the grant of the game medium will be given when the small winning combination corresponding to the grant of the game medium is won is the same in the non-AT state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state). is there.

The probability of winning at an index value IV = 2 where only watermelon winning data is set in the BB state and the probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 where only watermelon winning data is set in the non-BB state are It is the same, and the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process triggered by winning with an index value IV = 2 in the BB state and the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. With the winning, the probability of winning the transition in the AT state transition lottery process and the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) were won. With this as an opportunity, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process is the same. Therefore, the probability of winning at the index value IV in which only the watermelon winning data is set and giving a profit different from the grant of the game medium is the BB state and the non-BB state and the non-AT state. , It is the same as the non-BB state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

The probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 where only cherry winning data is set in the BB state and the probability of winning at an index value IV = 6 where only cherry winning data is set in the non-BB state are It is the same, and the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process triggered by winning with an index value IV = 4 in the BB state and the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. With the winning, the probability of winning the transition in the AT state transition lottery process and the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state and AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) were won. With this as an opportunity, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process is the same. Therefore, the probability of winning at the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set and giving a profit different from the grant of the game medium is the BB state and the non-BB state and the non-AT state. , It is the same as the non-BB state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

Furthermore, the winning combinations that trigger the execution of the advantageous lottery process in the BB state are the index values IV = 2 and 4 as described above, and the execution trigger of the transition lottery process of the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state As already explained, the winning combinations are index values IV = 4 and 6, and the winning combinations that trigger the execution of the additional lottery process in the non-BB state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) have already been explained. As shown, the index values IV = 4 and 6. Then, as described above, the probability of winning at the index value IV in which only the watermelon winning data is set and giving a profit different from the grant of the game medium is in the BB state and the non-BB state and the non-AT state. A certain state and a non-BB state and an AT state (ART preparation state, ART state) are the same, and the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set wins and the game medium is given. The probability that a profit different from that of the above is given depends on the BB state, the non-BB state and the non-AT state, and the non-BB state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state). It is the same. Therefore, the probability that a profit different from the grant of the game medium will be given when the small winning combination corresponding to the grant of the game medium is won is the BB state and the non-BB state and the non-AT state. , It is the same as the non-BB state and the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state).

When the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S1703: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1704). As a result, the number of continuous games per execution in the ART state will increase.

In the ART state processing, the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1705). Then, when the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1706: YES), it is determined whether or not the mode is the normal mode (step S1707). When it is not in the normal mode (step S1707: NO), "3" is set in the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1708). As a result, the main MPU 72 executes the ART end branch process (step S1310) at the next processing time in the corresponding process (FIG. 27) at the end of the game, and the game state shifts from the ART state to the ART end branch state. .. On the other hand, in the normal mode (step S1707: YES), the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1709). As a result, the AT state ends.

In the ART state processing, the transition processing of the RT mode is executed (step S1710). In the RT mode transition process, when it is specified that the 1st RT replay winning has occurred, it is shifted to the 1st RT mode, and when it is specified that the 2nd RT replay winning has occurred, it is shifted to the 2nd RT mode. When it is specified that the 1st fall replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the 2nd falling replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the 1st RT mode.

Next, the ART end branch process (step S1310) in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 27) will be described.

The ART end branch state is a game state in which one stays when one execution of the ART state is completed. In the ART end branch state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is notified when the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 1 to 6. On the other hand, even if the winning combination that enables the first fall replay winning or the second falling replay winning is won in the ART end branch state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the occurrence of these falling replay winnings. Is not notified. Then, when the first fall replay winning is generated in the ART end branch state and the mode shifts to the normal mode, the value of the AT state counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the AT state ends.

Here, even in the ART end branch state, if the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 as described above, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped to enable the establishment of the bell winning. Since the order is notified, it is in an advantageous state for the player. In this case, the ART end branch state is maintained at least until the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode. On the other hand, even if any of the winning combinations that enable the occurrence of the fall replay prize is won in the ART end branch state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the occurrence of the fall replay prize is not notified. As a result, in the ART end branch state, if the player's prediction hits and the occurrence of the fall replay prize is avoided, the ART end branch state can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to continue the ART end branch state which is advantageous to the player according to the player's own prediction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Relationship between profit grant mode and set value>
Next, the relationship between the mode of giving profit and the set value will be described. First, the relationship between the transition probability to the AT state and the set value in the non-BB state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 32 (a).

As described above, in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 or 6. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the non-BB state is any of "1" to "6" set in the slot machine 10. Is also "655". That is, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Then, in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 and the transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state executed is also 1/2 of that common to all settings. Further, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the non-BB state may be any of "1" to "6" set in the slot machine 10. It is "155". That is, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Then, in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 and the transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state executed is also 4/5 common to all settings. With the above configuration, the probability of transition to the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state is common to all settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the probability that the transition to the AT state will occur in the non-BB state and the non-AT state.

Only the watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as described above, and the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state includes the watermelon winning data and the first supplementary winning data as described above. Is set. That is, the watermelon winning data is set to both index values IV = 4 and 5 in the non-BB state. Further, when the winner is won with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, the establishment of the watermelon prize is prioritized over the establishment of the first supplementary prize. Therefore, when any of the index values IV = 4 and 5 is won in the non-BB state, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning can be stopped on the main line ML. On the other hand, the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state triggers the execution of the lottery process for shifting to the AT state as described above, whereas the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state triggers the lottery process for shifting to the AT state. Does not trigger the execution of.

In such a configuration, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state differs between the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "900", and when the set value is "2", the index value IV = 5 When the point value PV is set to "800" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "655" and the set value is "4". The point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "300", and when the set value is "5", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "150". When the set value is "6", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "50". As a result, the larger the set value, the lower the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state. On the other hand, as already explained, the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the lottery process for transition to the AT state triggered by winning with an index value of IV = 4 The probability of winning the transition is also common to all settings. Then, when the watermelon winning data is set in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the probability of winning the transition to the AT state increases as the set value increases. , The smaller the set value, the lower the value.

In addition, when the so-called watermelon winning data is set and the so-called dropout does not occur or the so-called dropout occurs with a certain probability, the symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize on the main line ML in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. When the combination of is stopped, the probability of winning the transition to the AT state is higher as the set value is larger, and lower as the set value is smaller. As a result, in the configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings regarding the probability that the transition to the AT state occurs in the non-BB state and the non-AT state as described above, the non-BB state is used. The player can predict the set value by grasping the probability that the transition to the AT state will occur when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning stops on the main line ML in the non-AT state. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's attention to the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon prize is stopped on the main line ML in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible. Incidentally, the probability that the watermelon prize will be established in the non-BB state and the non-AT state is lower as the set value is larger, and higher as the set value is smaller.

Not only the watermelon winning data but also the first supplementary winning data is set in the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state. Then, when the winner is won with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, even if the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is the timing at which the watermelon prize cannot be generated, the first supplementary prize is awarded. If it is possible to generate it, the first supplementary prize will be generated. As a result, even if the watermelon prize cannot be generated when the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state, it is added by measuring the number of times the first supplementary prize is generated. It is possible to predict the set value.

If you win with an index value of IV = 5 in the non-BB state, the watermelon prize will be given priority, and then the first supplementary prize will be given priority. However, depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, any prize will be established. Sometimes I don't. As a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty of predicting the set value to some extent by measuring that the player has won the prize at the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state.

Next, the relationship between the additional probability of the number of continuous games in the AT state and the set value will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 32 (b).

As described above, in the AT state (ART preparation state, ART state), the additional lottery process is executed when the index value IV = 4 or 6 is won. In this case, as described above, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Then, in the AT state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 and being executed in the additional lottery process is also halved, which is common to all settings. Further, as already explained, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Then, in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 and being executed in the additional lottery process is also 4/5 common to all settings. With the above configuration, the probability that the number of continuous games will be added in the AT state is common to all settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the probability that the number of continuous games will be added in the AT state.

In addition, the number of continuous games to be added when the additional winning is won in the additional lottery process is fixed at "50" regardless of the set value. As a result, the number of games expected to occur in the AT state is also common to all settings, and it is possible to prevent advantages or disadvantages from occurring between the settings regarding the number of games expected to occur in the AT state. It becomes.

As described above, the watermelon winning data is set to both index values IV = 4 and 5 in the non-BB state. Further, when the winner is won with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, the establishment of the watermelon prize is prioritized over the establishment of the first supplementary prize. Therefore, when any of the index values IV = 4 and 5 is won in the non-BB state, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning can be stopped on the main line ML. On the other hand, the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state triggers the execution of the additional lottery process as described above, whereas the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state does not trigger the execution of the additional lottery process.

As already explained in such a configuration, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state differs between the set values "1" to "6", and the larger the set value, the more non-probability. In the BB state, the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 5 is low. On the other hand, as already explained, the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings, and the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 4 is an additional lottery process. The probability of becoming is also common to all settings. Then, when the watermelon winning data is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the AT state, the probability of additional winning is higher as the set value is larger, and lower as the set value is smaller. In addition, when the so-called watermelon winning data is set, so-called omission does not occur, or if so-called omission occurs with a certain probability, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML in the AT state. The probability of winning an additional prize is higher as the set value is larger, and lower as the set value is smaller. As a result, in the configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings regarding the probability that the number of continuous games will be added in the AT state as described above, the watermelon winning will be supported on the main line ML in the AT state. By grasping the probability that the number of continuous games will be added when the combination of symbols is stopped, the player can predict the set value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML in the AT state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 and the probability of winning at an index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state are the same in the AT state and the non-AT state, and in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. In the case of winning with an index value of IV = 4, the probability of being transferred to the AT state in the lottery process and the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 4 in the non-BB state will be added. The odds of winning an additional prize in the lottery process are the same. As a result, when estimating the set value, the number of times that the profit other than the grant of the game medium is given when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning stops on the main line ML in the non-BB state is the AT state and the non-AT state. It is possible to measure in both AT states without distinction. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large number of trials for estimating the set value, and it is possible to improve the estimation accuracy of the set value.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous winning probability and the set value in the BB state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 32 (c).

As described above, in the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2 or 4. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 2 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the BB state is "1" to "6" regardless of the setting value of the slot machine 10. It is 655 ". That is, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 2 in the BB state is common to all settings. Then, in the BB state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 2 and the advantageous lottery process executed is also 1/2 of that common to all settings. Further, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the BB state is "1" to "6" regardless of the setting value of the slot machine 10. It is 155 ". That is, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the BB state is common to all settings. Then, in the BB state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 and the advantageous lottery process executed is also 4/5 common to all settings. With the above configuration, the probability of winning an advantage in the BB state is common to all settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the probability of winning an advantage in the BB state.

As already explained, only the watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, and the watermelon winning data and the first supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 3 in the BB state as already explained. Has been done. That is, the watermelon winning data is set to both index values IV = 2 and 3 in the BB state. Further, when the winner is won with the index value IV = 3 in the BB state, the establishment of the watermelon prize is prioritized over the establishment of the first supplementary prize. Therefore, when any of the index values IV = 2 and 3 is won in the BB state, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning can be stopped on the main line ML. On the other hand, the index value IV = 2 in the BB state triggers the execution of the advantageous lottery process as described above, whereas the index value IV = 3 in the BB state does not trigger the execution of the advantageous lottery process.

In such a configuration, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 3 in the BB state differs between the set values "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "1000", and when the set value is "2", the index value IV = 3 When the point value PV is set to "1000" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "3000" and the set value is "4". The point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "3000", and when the set value is "5", the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "5000". When the set value is "6", the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "5000". As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning at the index value IV = 3 in the BB state. On the other hand, as already explained, the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 2 in the BB state is common to all settings, and it is considered as an advantageous winning in the advantageous lottery process triggered by winning with an index value of IV = 2. The probability of becoming is also common to all settings. Then, when the watermelon winning data is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the BB state, the probability of winning the advantage becomes lower as the set value is larger, and becomes higher as the set value is smaller.

In addition, when the so-called watermelon winning data is set, so-called omission does not occur, or if so-called omission occurs with a certain probability, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML in the BB state. The probability of winning an advantage is lower as the set value is larger, and higher as the set value is smaller. As a result, in the configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings regarding the probability of winning in the BB state as described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is placed on the main line ML in the BB state. By grasping the probability of winning an advantage when stopped, the player can predict the set value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML in the BB state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the non-BB state, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML, the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium is granted increases as the set value increases, and the set value increases. The smaller the value, the lower the value, whereas in the BB state, the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be granted when the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon prize is stopped on the main line ML is the set value. The larger the value, the lower the value, and the smaller the set value, the higher the value. As a result, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped on the main line ML, the relationship between the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium is granted and the set value is reversed between the non-BB state and the BB state. It becomes possible to make a relationship. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the judgment index for estimating the set value.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
The first supplementary winning data is set to the index values IV = 1 and 5 respectively in the non-BB state, but the index value IV = 1 may not be set. In this case, since the first supplementary winning data is set only to the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, the index value IV = 5 was won when the first supplementary prize was established. It will be clear.

-When the number of continuous games in the ART state is added, the number of games to be added is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types may be set. Even in this case, by making the selection rate of the number of additional games of each type common to all settings, it is possible to make the expected value of the number of additional games common to all settings.

-In a configuration in which a plurality of main line MLs exist, the watermelon symbol is won depending on whether the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won or the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is won. The main line ML in which the combination is established may be different. In addition, one of the cases where the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the case where the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is won, the combination of watermelon symbols is established in the main line ML, and the other. May be configured such that the combination of watermelon symbols is established in the sublines SUL1 to SUL4. Further, the sublines SUL1 to SUL4 in which the combination of watermelon symbols is established differs between the case where the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the case where the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is won. May be good. In these cases, it is possible to distinguish between the case where the index value IV4 is won and the case where the index value IV = 5 is won.

-In the non-BB state, the probability of winning at an index value IV = 5 is set to be lower as the set value is larger, but it is not limited to this, and the probability of winning is higher as the set value is larger. May be good. In this case, the larger the set value, the lower the probability that a profit other than the granting of the game medium corresponding to the watermelon winning will be granted when the watermelon winning is established.

-The group with the larger set value (for example, the set value of "4", "5" and "6") is the group with the smaller set value (for example, the set value of "1", "2" and "3"). More than this, in the non-BB state, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 may be high, or the probability of winning may be low. Further, a group having an odd number of set values may have a higher probability of winning at an index value IV = 5 in a non-BB state than a group having an even number of set values, and a group having a lower probability of winning may be used. Good.

-The tendency of the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is opposite to the tendency of the probability of winning at the index value IV = 3 in the BB state. The configuration is not limited to, and may be the same.

-The probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration between the set values of "1" to "6", but as a configuration in which they differ but are substantially the same. May be good. Further, when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the probability of winning the transition or the additional winning is limited to the same configuration between the set values of "1" to "6". However, they may be configured to be substantially the same although they are different. Further, any of these configurations may be applied to the index value IV = 2 in the BB state.

-The probability of winning a transition or an additional winning in a non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration between the set values of "1" to "6", and may be substantially the same although they differ. , The configurations may be significantly different. Further, the probability of winning an advantage in the BB state is not limited to the same configuration between the set values of "1" to "6", and may be a configuration in which they are substantially the same although they are different. The configurations may be different.

-If the probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is significantly different between the set values of "1" to "6", but the probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 is won, a transition win or addition is made. Since the probability of winning is adjusted so as to fill the difference, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 and the transition winning or additional winning is the same between the set values of "1" to "6". Alternatively, the configurations may be substantially the same. In addition, when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the probability of winning the transition or the additional winning is significantly different, but the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 fills the difference. By adjusting, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 and the transition winning or the additional winning may be the same or substantially the same between the set values of "1" to "6". Further, any of these configurations may be applied to the index value IV = 2 in the BB state.

-Even if the watermelon winning data is set, the watermelon winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the watermelon winning data is set. In this case, the watermelon winning may be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of winning the transition in the lottery process for shifting to the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state is relatively high or low. .. The configurations of these high-probability modes and low-probability modes will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a lottery mode transition process executed by the main MPU 72. The lottery mode transition process is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 27) at the end of the game in the non-BB state and the non-AT state.

When the current lottery mode is not the high probability mode (step S1801: NO), it is a condition that any of the index values IV = 4 to 6 in the non-BB state is won in this game (step S1802: YES). ), The promotion lottery process of the lottery mode is executed (step S1803). Only the watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state as already explained, and the watermelon winning data and the first supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 5 as already explained. Therefore, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6 as described above. Even if the index value IV = 4 wins, the watermelon prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and even if the index value IV = 5 wins, each stop button 42 ~ Depending on the operation timing of 44, both the watermelon prize and the first supplementary prize may not be established, and even if the index value IV = 6 is won, the cherry prize is established depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. There is a possibility that the prize will not be won, but even if the corresponding prize is not established, the promotion lottery process will be executed if the prize is won with any of the index values IV = 4 to 6. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion lottery process may be executed on the condition that the corresponding prize is established.

In the promotion lottery process in the lottery mode, the promotion lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 74, and the value of the lottery counter is read out. Match against the promotion lottery table. FIG. 34A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the promotion lottery table. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the probability of winning the promotion in the promotion lottery process is the same regardless of which of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is won. However, the probability of winning the promotion differs depending on the set values "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the probability of winning the promotion is set to 1/6, and when the set value is "2", the probability of winning the promotion is set to 1/5. If it is set and the set value is "3", the probability of winning the promotion is set to 1/4, and if the set value is "4", the probability of winning the promotion is set to 1/3. If it is set and the set value is "5", the probability of winning the promotion is set to 1/2, and if the set value is "1", the probability of winning the promotion is set to 1/1. It is set. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the promotion in the promotion lottery process.

When the promotion is won in the promotion lottery process (step S1804: YES), "1" is set in the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1805). As a result, the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode.

When the current lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S1801: YES), the condition is that one of the index values IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state is won in this game (step S1806: YES). ), The demotion lottery process of the lottery mode is executed (step S1807). In the demotion lottery process in the lottery mode, the demotion lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 74, and the value of the lottery counter is read out. Check against the demoted lottery table. The demotion lottery table is common regardless of the index values IV = 1 to 3, and there is only one common type regardless of the set values "1" to "6", and the probability of winning the demotion. Is 1/10. When the demotion is won in the demotion lottery process (step S1808: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). As a result, the lottery mode becomes a low probability mode.

The probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the AT state in each of the high probability mode and the low probability mode will be described. FIG. 34 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition winning probability in the low probability mode, and FIG. 34 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition winning probability in the high probability mode.

In the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), if the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the probability of winning the transition in the AT state transition lottery process is 1 /. If the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is set to 2, the probability of winning the transition in the AT state transition lottery process is 4/5. On the other hand, in the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the transition winning is performed in the transition lottery process to the AT state. The probability of winning is 2/3, and when the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is won, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the AT state is 5/6. As a result, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the AT state than the low-probability mode.

In the above configuration, when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won in the low probability mode, the probability of winning the transition to the AT state, and when the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is won. The probability of winning the transition to the AT state is common to all settings. Similarly, in the high probability mode, when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the probability of winning the transition to the AT state, and when the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is won. The probability of winning the transition to the AT state is common to all settings. As a result, even if the lottery mode has a low probability mode and a high probability mode, the probability of winning the transition in the lottery process for shifting to the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state is It is possible to prevent any advantages or disadvantages between the settings.

Watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 5 as in the index value IV = 4, and even if the index value IV = 5 is won, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is not executed. In this case, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state differs between the set values "1" to "6" as in the first embodiment, and specifically, The larger the set value, the lower the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state. As a result, similarly to the first embodiment, when the watermelon winning data is set in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the transition to the AT state is won. The larger the set value, the higher the probability, and the smaller the set value, the lower the probability. In addition, when the so-called watermelon winning data is set and the so-called dropout does not occur or the so-called dropout occurs with a certain probability, the symbol corresponding to the watermelon prize on the main line ML in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. When the combination of is stopped, the probability of winning the transition to the AT state is higher as the set value is larger, and lower as the set value is smaller. Therefore, in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the player sets the set value by grasping the probability that the transition to the AT state will occur when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning stops on the main line ML. It becomes possible to predict.

As described above, the probability of winning a promotion in the promotion lottery process for determining whether to promote the lottery mode from the low probability mode to the high probability mode increases as the set value increases. As a result, in a configuration in which there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings regarding the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the AT state in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the transition probability to the high probability mode The larger the set value, the more advantageous it becomes.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
-In the second embodiment described above, the player is not notified whether the lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, but the player determines which of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may be configured to notify the user. For example, as an effect on at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, an effect indicating which of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode may be executed may be executed. Further, it may be configured to suggest an expected value of being in the high probability mode. For example, as the effect in at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, a low expectation effect, a medium expectation effect, and a high expectation effect are executed, and the low expectation effect → medium. The configuration may be such that the expectation of being in the high probability mode increases in the order of expectation effect → high expectation effect.

-The setting value that has a higher probability of winning a promotion in the promotion lottery process is not limited to a higher configuration, and the setting values of "1" to "3" have the same probability of winning a promotion and "4". The set values of "6" have the same probability of winning a promotion, and the latter group may have a higher probability of winning a promotion than the former group. Further, the smaller the set value, the higher the probability of winning the promotion, or the odd-numbered set value may have a higher or lower probability of winning the promotion than the even-numbered set value.

-The probability of being demoted and won in the demoted lottery process may be different depending on the set values of "1" to "6". For example, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the demotion, or the smaller the set value, the higher the probability of winning the demotion. The probability of being demoted and won may be higher or lower than the value.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the number of main line MLs is different from that of the first embodiment, and a plurality of main line MLs are set, and the type of main line ML when the watermelon prize is established differs depending on the winning index value IV. ing. Further, the relationship between the mode of giving profit and the set value is also different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 35 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the four main lines ML1 to ML4 are set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be visually recognized. The first main line ML1 is a line connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. The second main line ML2 is a line connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The third main line ML3 is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. The fourth main line ML4 is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with the specified number of medals bet, and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established in any of the first to fourth main lines ML1 to ML4, Either the benefit of paying out medals, the benefit of replaying, or the transition of the gaming state is granted. Even if the combination of the symbols to be won is established in the sub-line SL connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R, the winning is not established.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the winning symbols of the first supplementary winning data set to the index values IV = 1 and 5 in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 3 in the BB state is the same as the first embodiment. It's different. Specifically, the combination in which the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, and the left The first supplementary winning data is a combination in which the stop symbol of the reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol. It is set as a combination of symbols that will win a prize.

By setting the combination of symbols that will win the first supplementary winning data as described above, the watermelon has the index value IV = 4 and the index value IV = 5 for which the watermelon winning data is set in the non-BB state. The main lines ML1 to ML4 are different in the case where the winning is established, and the main when the watermelon winning is established with the index value IV = 2 and the index value IV = 3 in which the watermelon winning data is set in the BB state. The types of lines ML1 to ML4 are different. The types of the main lines ML1 to ML4 when the watermelon winning is established will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b). FIG. 36A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of main lines ML1 to ML4 when the watermelon winning is established when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and when the index value IV = 2 in the BB state. 36 (b) is for explaining the types of main lines ML1 to ML4 when the watermelon prize is established when the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state and when the index value IV = 3 in the BB state. It is explanatory drawing of.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, the watermelon prize is established on the third main line ML3. This is realized by the setting of the pull-in bit described in the first embodiment. That is, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, or when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, the "watermelon" symbol is set by setting the acquired number bit in the determination information buffer B. The combination of symbols stops at one of the main lines ML1 to ML4. The priority determination value of the symbol number is larger than the priority determination value of the other symbol number, but by setting the pull-in bit, the "watermelon" symbol The priority judgment value of the symbol number at which the combination of the symbols stops at the third main line ML3 is larger than the priority determination value of the symbol number at which the combination of the "watermelon" symbols stops at the other main lines ML1, ML2, ML4. Become. As a result, when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 2 in the BB state as described above, the watermelon prize is established on the third main line ML3.

As shown in FIG. 36B, when the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state and the index value IV = 3 in the BB state, a watermelon prize is established on the fourth main line ML4. Not only the watermelon winning data but also the first supplementary winning data is set in these index values IV, the combination of the symbols to be the first supplementary winning is set as described above, and the pull-in bit is set to the first. 4 Since the stop on the main line ML4 is set to be prioritized, the priority determination value of the symbol number at which the combination of the "watermelon" symbols stops at the 4th main line ML4 is set to the other main lines ML1 to ML3. The value is larger than the priority judgment value of the symbol number at which the combination of "watermelon" symbols is stopped.

For example, for the middle reel 32M, when the "replay" symbol stops in the lower row as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the "watermelon" symbol stops in the middle row. There is a possibility that a prize will be established, and a watermelon prize will be established on the fourth main line ML4. Then, the pull-in bit of the symbol number that causes this stop mode is set to a value larger than the pull-in bit of the symbol number at which the "replay" symbol stops in the middle row and the "watermelon" symbol stops in the upper row. Therefore, the priority determination value of the symbol number at which the "replay" symbol stops at the lower stage of the middle reel 32M is larger than the priority determination value of the other symbol numbers.

As for the right reel 32R, when the "white 7" symbol stops in the lower row as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the "watermelon" symbol stops in the upper row. There is a possibility that one supplementary prize will be established, and there is a possibility that a watermelon prize will be established on the fourth main line ML4. In this case, the priority determination value of the symbol number that causes the stop mode is larger than the priority determination value of the other symbol numbers in relation to the acquired number of bits.

When the watermelon winning is established as described above, the types of main lines ML1 to ML4 are the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the index value IV = 2 in the BB state, and the index value in the non-BB state. Due to the difference between the case of IV = 5 and the case of index value IV = 3 in the BB state, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped, it corresponds to any index value IV. It becomes possible for the player to grasp whether or not the player is present.

37 (a) to 37 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the mode of giving profit and the set value. First, the relationship between the transition probability to the AT state and the set value in the non-BB state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37 (a).

In the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed when the winning is performed at any of the index values IV = 4 to 6. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the non-BB state is any of "1" to "6" set in the slot machine 10. Is also "155". That is, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Then, in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 6 and the transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state executed is also 4/5 common to all settings.

The probability of winning with an index value of IV = 4 in the non-BB state differs between the set values "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "100", and when the set value is "2", the index value IV = 4 When the point value PV is set to "200" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "300" and the set value is "4". The point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "400", and when the set value is "5", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "500". When the set value is "6", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "600". As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state. On the other hand, in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the probability of winning the transition to the AT state executed by winning at the index value IV = 4 is 1/2, which is common to all settings.

The probability of winning with an index value of IV = 5 in the non-BB state differs between the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "600", and when the set value is "2", the index value IV = 5 When the point value PV is set to "500" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "400" and the set value is "4". The point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "300", and when the set value is "5", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "200". When the set value is "6", the point value PV of the index value IV = 5 is set to "100". As a result, the larger the set value, the lower the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state. On the other hand, in the non-BB state and the non-AT state, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 and the transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state executed is halved, which is common to all settings.

In the case of the above configuration, the probability that the index value IV = 4 will be won and the transition to the AT state will be won, and the index value IV = 5 will be the winning and the transition to the AT state will be the lottery process. The probability of winning a transition will fluctuate according to the set value, but there is a trade-off between the former probability fluctuating according to the set value and the latter probability fluctuating according to the set value. It is a relationship of. Therefore, the probability that the index value IV = 4 will be won and the transition to the AT state will be a transition winning, and the index value IV = 5 will be won and the transition to the AT state will be a transition winning. The total with the probability of becoming is common to all settings. And, as already explained, the main line where the watermelon prize is established when the index value IV = 4 and the main line where the watermelon prize is established when the index value IV = 5 is won. The types of ML1 to ML4 are different. As a result, the watermelon prize is won in the non-BB state and the non-AT state while preventing an advantage or disadvantage between the settings regarding the probability that the transition to the AT state occurs in the non-BB state and the non-AT state. When the watermelon winning is established and the transition to the AT state occurs, the player can predict the set value by grasping the selection frequency of the main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is established.

Next, the relationship between the additional probability of the number of continuous games in the AT state and the set value will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37 (b).

In the AT state, the additional lottery process is executed when the player wins at any of the index values IV = 4 to 6. In this case, the winning probabilities in relation to the set values of the index values IV = 4 to 6 are the same as in the case described with reference to FIG. 37 (a), and each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is set. The probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed as an opportunity is the same as the probability of winning a transition in the transition lottery process to the AT state executed with each of the index values IV = 4 to 6. As a result, while preventing an advantage or disadvantage between the settings regarding the probability that the number of continuous games will be added in the AT state, when the watermelon prize is established in the AT state and the number of continuous games is added, the number is increased. By grasping the selection frequency of the main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon winning is established, the player can predict the set value.

Further, in the non-BB state, the relationship between the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 and the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 and the set value is the same in the AT state and the non-AT state, and the non-BB state. If the index value IV = 4 or 5 is won in the non-AT state, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the AT state and the index value IV = in the non-BB state and the AT state. If you win in 4 or 5, the probability of winning in the additional lottery process is the same. As a result, in the case of estimating the set value, when the watermelon prize is established and the profit other than the grant of the game medium is given, the selection frequency of the main lines ML1 to ML4 for which the watermelon prize is established is set to AT state and non-AT. It is possible to measure without distinguishing between both states. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large number of trials for predicting the set value, and it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the set value.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous winning probability and the set value in the BB state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37 (c).

In the BB state, the advantageous lottery process is executed when the player wins at any of the index values IV = 2-4. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the BB state may be any of "1" to "6" set in the slot machine 10. It is "155". That is, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the BB state is common to all settings. Then, in the BB state, the probability of winning the transition with the index value IV = 4 and the transition to the AT state executed is also 4/5 common to all settings.

The probability of winning with an index value of IV = 2 in the BB state differs between the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 is set to "600", and when the set value is "2", the index value IV = 2 When the point value PV is set to "500" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 is set to "400" and the set value is "4". The point value PV of the index value IV = 2 is set to "300", and when the set value is "5", the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 is set to "200". When the set value is "6", the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 is set to "100". As a result, the larger the set value, the lower the probability of winning at the index value IV = 2 in the BB state. On the other hand, in the BB state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 2 and being executed in the advantageous lottery process is 1/2, which is common to all settings.

The probability of winning with an index value of IV = 3 in the BB state differs between the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "100", and when the set value is "2", the index value IV = 3 When the point value PV is set to "200" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "300" and the set value is "4". The point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "400", and when the set value is "5", the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "500". When the set value is "6", the point value PV of the index value IV = 3 is set to "600". As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning at the index value IV = 3 in the BB state. On the other hand, in the BB state, the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process executed with the index value IV = 3 is 1/2, which is common to all settings.

In the case of the above configuration, the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process when the index value IV = 2 is won, and the probability of winning in the advantageous lottery process when the index value IV = 3 is used in the advantageous lottery process. The probability of winning an advantage will fluctuate according to the set value, but there is a trade-off between the former probability fluctuating according to the set value and the latter probability fluctuating according to the set value. It is a relationship of. Therefore, the total of the probability of winning with an index value IV = 2 and winning in the advantageous lottery process and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 3 and winning in the advantageous lottery process is all set. It is common. And, as already explained, the main line ML1 to ML4 where the watermelon prize is established when the index value IV = 2 and the main line where the watermelon prize is established when the index value IV = 3 is won. The types of ML1 to ML4 are different. As a result, while making sure that there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings regarding the probability of winning in the BB state, the main line in which the watermelon winning is established when the watermelon winning is established in the BB state and the winning is advantageous. By grasping the selection frequency of ML1 to ML4, the player can predict the set value.

Further, in the non-BB state, when a profit other than the granting of the game medium is granted, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is stopped. As for the types of main lines ML1 to ML4, the larger the set value, the third mainline. It becomes easy to become ML3, and the smaller the set value, the easier it becomes to become the 4th main line ML4, whereas in the BB state, when a profit other than the granting of the game medium is given, the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is As for the types of the main lines ML1 to ML4 to be stopped, the larger the set value, the easier it becomes the fourth main line ML4, and the smaller the set value, the easier it becomes the third main line ML3. As a result, the relationship between the main lines ML1 to ML4 and the set value is reversed between the non-BB state and the BB state, in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon winning is likely to stop when a profit other than the grant of the game medium is granted. It becomes possible to make a relationship. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the judgment index for estimating the set value.

<Another form of the third embodiment>
-The probability of winning a transition or an additional winning when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won is not limited to the configuration in which the set values of "1" to "6" are the same. The configuration may be substantially the same. In addition, the probability of winning a transition or an additional winning when winning with an index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is limited to the configuration in which the set values of "1" to "6" are the same. It may be configured to be substantially the same. Further, any of these configurations may be applied to index values IV = 2 and 3 in the BB state.

-The probability of winning a transition or an additional winning in a non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration between the set values of "1" to "6", and may be substantially the same although they differ. , The configurations may be significantly different. Further, the probability of winning an advantage in the BB state is not limited to the same configuration between the set values of "1" to "6", and may be a configuration in which they are substantially the same although they are different. The configurations may be different.

-In the non-BB state, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 increases as the set value increases, and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state decreases as the set value increases. , This relationship may be reversed. Further, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 2 in the BB state decreases as the set value increases, and the probability of winning with an index value IV = 3 in the BB state increases as the set value increases. This relationship may be reversed.

-If the probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state differs between the set values of "1" to "6" and the index value IV = 4 wins, the transition winning or additional winning The probability of winning is the same between the set values of "1" to "6", but on the contrary, the probability of winning with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is "1" to "1". It is the same among the set values of "6", and the probability of winning the transition or the additional winning when the index value IV = 4 is won differs between the set values of "1" to "6". It may be configured. In addition, if the probability of winning at an index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state differs between the set values of "1" to "6" and the index value IV = 5 wins, the transition winning or addition is added. The probability of winning is the same between the set values of "1" to "6", but on the contrary, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is "1". ~ The probability of winning a transition or an additional win when the index value IV = 5 is the same among the set values of "6" is different between the set values of "1" to "6". It may be configured to be used.

The first supplementary winning data is set to the index values IV = 1 and 5 respectively in the non-BB state, but the index value IV = 1 may not be set. In this case, since the first supplementary winning data is set only to the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, the index value IV = 5 was won when the first supplementary prize was established. It will be clear.

-One of the cases where the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the case where the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is won, the combination of watermelon symbols is established in the main line ML, and the other is. The combination of watermelon symbols may be established in the subline SL. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of subline SLs exist, a combination of watermelon symbols is obtained when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and when the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is won. The sub-line SL in which is satisfied may be configured to be different.

-If an index value IV = 4 to 6 in the non-BB state is won, the transition lottery process or the additional lottery process is executed regardless of whether or not the prize corresponding to the winning combination is established. It is not limited to the configuration, and the transition lottery process and the additional lottery process are executed on the condition that the index value IV = 4 to 6 in the non-BB state is won and the prize corresponding to the winning combination is established. It may be configured to be. Similarly, the advantageous lottery process may be executed on the condition that the winning combination is won at any of the index values IV = 2 to 4 in the BB state and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the relationship between the mode of giving profit and the set value is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

38 (a) to 38 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the mode of giving profit and the set value in the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c), the relationship between the profit-giving mode and the set value when the index value IV = 6 in the non-BB state is won, and the index value IV = in the BB state. The relationship between the mode of giving profit and the set value in the case of winning in 4 is the same as that of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c), the relationship between the probability of winning the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the set value, and the probability and setting of winning the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state. The relationship with the value, the relationship between the probability of winning the index value IV = 2 in the BB state and the set value, and the relationship between the probability of winning the index value IV = 3 in the BB state and the set value are the third implementations described above. It is the same as the form. On the other hand, when each of these index values IV is won, the probability that a profit other than the granting of the game medium is granted is different from the third embodiment.

Specifically, the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be granted when the index value IV = 4 is won in the non-BB state is set as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b). When the value is "1", it is 1/1, when the set value is "2", it is 1/2, and when the set value is "3", it is 1/3, and the set value is In the case of "4", it is 1/4, when the set value is "5", it is 1/5, and when the set value is "6", it is 1/6. Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b), the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium is given when the index value IV = 5 is won in the non-BB state is set to " In the case of "1", it is 1/6, when the set value is "2", it is 1/5, when the set value is "3", it is 1/4, and the set value is "4". In the case of, it is 1/3, when the set value is "5", it is 1/2, and when the set value is "6", it is 1/1.

With the above configuration, when a profit other than the grant of the game medium is given, the probability that the watermelon prize will be established in the third main line ML3 is common to all settings, and the profit other than the grant of the game medium is given. In this case, the probability that the watermelon prize will be established in the 4th main line ML4 is common to all settings. On the other hand, the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be given to the third main line ML3 that the watermelon prize is established, and the game medium will be granted to the fourth main line ML4 that the watermelon prize is established. The probability that a profit other than the above will be given differs depending on the set value of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability that a profit other than the granting of the game medium will be given to the third main line ML3 that the watermelon prize is established becomes lower as the set value is larger, and the watermelon prize is given to the fourth main line ML4. The larger the set value, the higher the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be granted to the establishment. As a result, the player predicts the set value by grasping the types of the main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon prize is established and the probability that a profit other than the addition of the game medium is given to the establishment of the watermelon prize. Is possible.

Further, even with such a configuration, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and a profit other than the granting of the game medium is common to all settings, and the index value in the non-BB state. The probability of winning at IV = 5 and granting profits other than the granting of game media is common to all settings. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while preventing an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings with respect to the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium is granted in the non-BB state.

As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the probability that the index value IV = 2 is won in the BB state and a profit other than the grant of the game medium is granted is 1/6 when the set value is "1". Yes, it is 1/5 when the set value is "2", 1/4 when the set value is "3", and 1/3 when the set value is "4". When the set value is "5", it is 1/2, and when the set value is "6", it is 1/1. Further, the probability that the index value IV = 3 is won in the BB state and the profit other than the grant of the game medium is granted is 1 / when the set value is "1" as shown in FIG. 38 (c). It is 1, when the set value is "2", it is 1/2, when the set value is "3", it is 1/3, and when the set value is "4", it is 1/4. Yes, it is 1/5 when the set value is "5" and 1/6 when the set value is "6".

With the above configuration, the probability that a watermelon prize will be established in the third main line ML3 is common to all settings when a profit other than the granting of the game medium is granted even in the BB state, and other than the granting of the game medium. The probability that a watermelon prize will be established on the 4th main line ML4 when a profit is given is common to all settings. On the other hand, the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be given to the third main line ML3 that the watermelon prize is established, and the game medium will be granted to the fourth main line ML4 that the watermelon prize is established. The probability that a profit other than the above will be given differs depending on the set value of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability that a profit other than the granting of the game medium will be granted to the third main line ML3 that the watermelon prize is established increases as the set value increases, and the watermelon prize is awarded to the fourth main line ML4. The larger the set value, the lower the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be granted to the establishment. As a result, the player predicts the set value by grasping the types of the main lines ML1 to ML4 in which the watermelon prize is established and the probability that a profit other than the addition of the game medium is given to the establishment of the watermelon prize. Is possible.

Further, in the non-BB state, the probability that a profit other than the granting of the game medium is given to the watermelon winning in the third main line ML3 becomes lower as the set value is larger, and the watermelon is given to the fourth main line ML4. The probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be granted to the winning is higher as the set value is larger, whereas in the BB state, the watermelon winning is established in the third main line ML3. On the other hand, the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be granted increases as the set value increases, and the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium will be granted for the establishment of the watermelon prize in the 4th main line ML4. Is lower as the set value is larger. As a result, the relationship between the non-BB state and the BB state is the relationship between the probability that a profit other than the grant of the game medium is given to the watermelon winning in the third main line ML3 or the fourth main line ML4 and the set value. It is possible to have the opposite relationship. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the judgment index for estimating the set value.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the winning data set to the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state and the winning data set to the index value IV = 3 in the BB state are different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table at the set value of “3”, and FIG. 39 (b) is for explaining the BB lottery table at the set value of “3”. It is explanatory drawing.

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the bell winning data and the watermelon winning data are set in the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state, and the index value IV = 3 in the BB state as shown in FIG. 39 (b). Bell winning data and watermelon winning data are set in. In this case, the number of game media granted in the case of winning the bell is "9", and the number of granting game media in the case of winning the watermelon is "7". Therefore, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state or the index value IV = 3 in the BB state, any combination of "bell" symbols is used depending on the setting of the acquired number bit in the determination information buffer B. The priority determination value of the symbol number that stops at the main lines ML1 to ML4 is larger than the priority determination value of the symbol number that stops at any of the main lines ML1 to ML4 in the combination of the "watermelon" symbols. Therefore, when the winner is won with the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state or the index value IV = 3 in the BB state, the bell prize is prioritized over the watermelon prize. The winning probabilities of index values IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state are common to all settings, and the winning probabilities of index value IV = 1 in the BB state are common to all settings.

In the above configuration, by setting the relationship between the profit granting mode and the set value as described in the third embodiment, the watermelon prize is established and the profit other than the granting of the game medium is granted. The probability and the probability that a profit other than the granting of the game medium will be granted when the bell prize is established will fluctuate according to the set value, but the former probability will fluctuate according to the set value. There is a trade-off relationship with the amount that the latter probability fluctuates according to the set value. Therefore, the total of the probability that the watermelon prize is established and the profit other than the grant of the game medium is granted and the probability that the bell prize is established and the profit other than the grant of the game medium is granted is common to all settings. There is. As a result, when a prize corresponding to the grant of the game medium is established, there is no advantage or disadvantage between the settings regarding the probability that the benefit other than the grant of the game medium is granted, and the profit other than the grant of the game medium is obtained. By grasping the ratio between the watermelon winning and the bell winning that was established when is given, the player can predict the set value.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the trigger for adding the number of continuous games in the AT state is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won in the present embodiment and the privilege given when the prize is won.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, the watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the normal replay prize, the first RT replay prize, and the second RT replay A prize, a first fall replay prize, a second fall replay prize, a first BB prize, and a second BB prize are set. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned prizes, special replay prize, first special replay prize, second special replay prize, third special replay prize, and fourth special replay are given as prizes to which the privilege of replay is given. A prize, a fifth special replay prize, and a sixth special replay prize are set.

When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. , Special replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second 1 Special replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the second special replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the 3rd special replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second 4 Special replay prizes. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the 5th special replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, the second 6 Special replay prizes.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second RT mode lottery table at the set value of “3”.

The same winning data as in the first embodiment is set in the index values IV = 1 to 15. In this embodiment, the index value IV = 16 also exists, and the index value IV = 16 has the normal replay winning data, the special replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, the second special replay winning data, and the third special replay. Winning data, 4th special replay winning data, 5th special replay winning data, and 6th special replay winning data are set. If the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M when the index value IV = 16 is won, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 16 is won and the first stop is the right reel 32R, if the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is a predetermined operation timing, a special replay prize is established and each stop button. When the operation timings of 42 to 44 are not the predetermined operation timings, one of the first to sixth special replay prizes is surely established.

In the AT state and the second RT mode, that is, in the ART state, if the index value IV = 16 is won, the right reel 32R is first stopped and the symbol corresponding to the special replay prize is awarded. The image display device 63 executes a notification instructing to stop the combination of. The notification is started until the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started and the first stop can be performed. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notification, a special replay prize is established in the main line ML. Then, when the special replay prize is established, the lottery process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT state is executed. By the way, even if the special replay prize cannot be established even though the index value IV = 16 is established in the ART state, it will be added even if either the normal replay prize or the 1st to 6th special replay prizes is established. The lottery process is executed. That is, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16 in the ART state, the additional lottery process is executed regardless of the winning result. However, if Index Tsu IV = 16 is won in the ART state, the additional lottery process may be executed on the condition that the special replay prize is established, and whether or not the special replay prize is established. Regardless of the above, the additional lottery process may be executed on the condition that the right reel 32R is first stopped.

The combination of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the BB lottery table corresponding to the index value IV = 16 is not set. Therefore, the special replay prize and the first to sixth special replay prizes are prizes that are established only in the second RT mode, and are not established in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the BB state.

The addition process for executing the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. In addition, the addition process is not limited to the ART state, but is a situation in which the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more after the transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state, and the game has fallen to either the first RT mode or the normal mode. It is also executed in. Every time one game is digested, even if the value of the ART game counter is 1 or more after the transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state and the game falls to either the 1st RT mode or the normal mode. Since the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted, the addition process is executed correspondingly even in the relevant situation.

In the addition process, when the index value IV = 4, 6 or 16 is won in the second RT mode (step S1901 and step S1902: YES), the first addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1903). On the other hand, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 or 6 instead of the second RT mode (step S1901: NO, step S1904: YES), the second addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1905).

When the process of step S1903 or step S1905 is executed, the additional lottery process is executed (step S1906). In the additional lottery process, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the value of the lottery counter is read from the read first additional table or the second additional table. Match. When the result of the additional lottery process is the additional winning (step S1907: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1908). As a result, the number of continuous games per execution in the ART state will increase.

FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first addition table. In the first addition table, 100 random numbers are set for the index value IV = 4 and 100 random values are set for the index value IV = 6 as the random values to be added and won in the additional lottery process. It is set, and 300 random values are set for the index value IV = 16. In the additional lottery process, the value of the lottery counter of the main RAM 74 is used as described above, but the lottery counter is a loop counter updated in the range of "0" to "399". .. That is, the number of random numbers that can be acquired from the lottery counter is 400. Therefore, if an index value IV = 4 is won, or if an index value IV = 6 is won, the probability of being an additional winner in the additional lottery process is 1/4, and the index value IV = If the player wins at 16, the probability of winning the additional lottery is 3/4.

FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second addition table. In the second addition table, 400 random values are set for the index value IV = 4 and 100 random values are set for the index value IV = 6 as the random values to be added and won in the additional lottery process. It is set. As already explained, the number of random numbers that can be acquired from the lottery counter used in the additional lottery process is 400. Therefore, if an index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of being an additional winner in the additional lottery process is 1/1, and if an index value IV = 6 is won, the additional lottery process is performed. The probability of winning an additional prize is 1/4.

Here, in the second RT mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "655", and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is "155". , The point value PV set to the index value IV = 16 is "655". On the other hand, in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "655", and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is It is "155". Then, if the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process is expressed by the point value PV, it will be 655 × 1/4 + 155 × 1/4 + 655 × 3/4 in the second RT mode, and in the normal mode and the first RT mode It becomes 655 × 1/1 + 155 × 1/4. That is, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process is the same in the case of the second RT mode and the case of the normal mode and the first RT mode. As a result, even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode in the middle of the ART state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in terms of the probability of winning the additional prize. In addition, the number of continuous games given when the additional winning is won is constant. Therefore, even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode in the middle of the ART state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged with respect to the expected value of the number of continuous games to be added.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
-In the first addition table, all the number of winning values set to the index value IV = 16 is assigned to the number of winning values with the index value IV = 4 in the second addition table. The number of winning values set to the index value IV = 16 in the first addition table is not limited to this, and is distributed to the index values IV = 4 and 6 in the second addition table, respectively. It may be configured. Further, the distribution ratio may be different depending on the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the larger the set value, the larger the distribution ratio to the index value IV = 4 side in the second addition table, and the smaller the set value, the larger the distribution ratio to the index value IV = 6 side in the second addition table. It may be configured. As a result, when the addition lottery process is executed using the second addition table, the frequency of addition when the index value IV = 4 is won and the addition occurrence frequency when the index value IV = 6 is won. It is possible to make the player predict the set value from the ratio with the occurrence frequency of the addition.

-The probability of the addition occurring is the same when the first addition table is referenced and when the second addition table is referenced, but the probability of the addition is not limited to this, and the probability of the addition occurring is not limited to this. Although they are different, they may have substantially the same configuration. Further, the expected value of the number of additional games is the same when the first additional table is referred to and when the second additional table is referred to, but the expected value is not limited to this. Although they are different, they may have substantially the same configuration.

-The number of additional games selected when the additional game is won in the additional lottery process is not limited to one type, but is selected from the number of additional games existing in multiple types. May be good.

-In the normal mode and the first RT mode, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode is not limited to the configuration in which the winning combination does not exist as a lottery target combination, and even in the normal mode and the first RT mode. A combination corresponding to the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a corresponding combination) may exist as a combination to be drawn. In this case, when the winning probability of the corresponding combination in the normal mode and the first RT mode is lower than the winning probability of the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode, and the second addition table is referred to. The configuration may be such that the winning of the above-mentioned corresponding role can be added as an opportunity to win the winning. In this configuration, the number of winning values assigned to the corresponding combination in the second addition table is increased from the number of winning values assigned to the index value IV = 16 in the first addition table, thereby adding the second addition. The expected value of the number of additional games when the table is referenced may be the same as or substantially the same as when the first additional table is referenced. In addition, the number of winning values assigned to the corresponding combinations in the second addition table is equal to or less than the number of winning values assigned to the index value IV = 16 in the first addition table, and the second addition is added. By making the number of winning values assigned to the index value IV = 4 or 6 in the table larger than that in the case of the first additional table, the expected value of the number of additional games when the second additional table is referred to is the first additional. It may be the same as or substantially the same as when the table is referenced.

-By increasing only the number of winning values set in the index value IV = 4 in the second additional table than in the case of the first table, the expected value of the number of additional games when the second additional table is referred to. Is not limited to the same or substantially the same configuration as when the first addition table is referred to, and the number of winning values and the index value IV = which are set to the index value IV = 4 in the second addition table. The second additional table is referred to by making both the average values of the number of additional games given when the additional winning is won with the winning of 4 different from the case where the first additional table is referred to. The expected value of the number of additional games in the case may be the same as or substantially the same as the case where the first additional table is referred to.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the addition processing is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the sixth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the addition process in the present embodiment.

In the addition process, it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 4 or 6 was won in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, and whether or not the second RT mode was won with the index value IV = 16. Whether or not it is determined (step S2001). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the additional lottery process is executed (step S2002). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is read in the main RAM 74, and the value of the lottery counter is read out from the main ROM 73. Match against the table. Unlike the sixth embodiment, the additional lottery table is the number of winning random numbers set for the index value IV = 4 in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. , And the number of winning random numbers set for the index value IV = 6 is fixed at 100 each. Further, the number of winning random numbers set for the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode is fixed at 100.

In the case of additional winning in the additional lottery process (step S2003: YES), in the second RT mode (step S2004: YES), the index values IV won in this game are "4" and "6". Regardless of which of "16" and "16", "50" is added as the number of games added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2005). On the other hand, in the case of the normal mode or the first RT mode (step S2004: NO), if the index value IV won in this game is "6" (step S2006: NO), the number of ART games in the main RAM 74. If "50" is added to the counter as the number of games (step S2005) and the index value IV won in this game is "4" (step S2006: YES), the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 Add "100" as the number of games to be added to (step S2007).

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "655", the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is "155", and the index value The point value PV set to IV = 16 is "655". On the other hand, in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "655", and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is It is "155". In addition, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process is 1 in any case where the index value IV = 4, the index value IV = 6, and the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode. It is / 4. In addition, the number of additional games given when the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process is 50 games regardless of the index values IV = 4, 6 and 16 in the second RT mode. In the normal mode and the first RT mode, 100 games are used when the index value IV = 4, and 50 games are used when the index value IV = 6. Then, the expected value of the number of additional games to be given is 50 × 1/4 × 655/65536 + 50 × 1/4 × 155/65536 + 50 × 1/4 × 655/65536 in the case of the second RT mode, which is usually In the case of the mode and the first RT mode, it is 100 × 1/4 × 655/65536 + 50 × 1/4 × 155/65536. That is, the expected value of the number of additional games to be given is the same in the case of the second RT mode and the case of the normal mode and the first RT mode. As a result, even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode in the middle of the ART state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged with respect to the expected value of the number of additional games to be given.

<Another form of the seventh embodiment>
-The number of additional games selected when the additional game is won in the additional lottery process is not limited to one type, but is selected from the number of additional games existing in multiple types. May be good. In this case, the expected value of the number of additional games in the case where the index value IV = 4 is won and the additional game is won in the situation other than the second RT mode is added together with the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode. By increasing the expected value of the number of additional games in the case of winning, the expected value of the number of additional games when the first additional table is referred to and when the second additional table is referred to is the same or substantially the same. It becomes possible to.

<8th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the addition processing is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the sixth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the addition process in the present embodiment.

In the addition process, when the index value IV = 4, 6 or 16 is won in the second RT mode (step S2101 and step S2102: YES), the first addition table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2103). On the other hand, when the winning is performed at the index value IV = 4 or 6 instead of the second RT mode, or when none of the index values IV is won (step S2101: NO, step S2104: YES), the second addition table is displayed. Read from the main ROM 73 (step S2105).

When the process of step S2103 or step S2105 is executed, the additional lottery process is executed (step S2106). In the additional lottery process, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the value of the lottery counter is read from the read first additional table or the second additional table. Match. When the result of the additional lottery process is the additional winning (step S2107: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2108). As a result, the number of continuous games per execution in the ART state will increase.

FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first addition table. In the first addition table, 100 random numbers are set for the index value IV = 4 and 100 random values are set for the index value IV = 6 as the random values to be added and won in the additional lottery process. It is set, and 300 random values are set for the index value IV = 16. The number of random numbers that can be acquired from the lottery counter used in the additional lottery process is 400. Therefore, if an index value IV = 4 is won, or if an index value IV = 6 is won, the probability of being an additional winner in the additional lottery process is 1/4, and the index value IV = If the player wins at 16, the probability of winning the additional lottery is 3/4.

FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second addition table. In the second addition table, 100 random numbers are set for the index value IV = 4 and 100 random values are set for the index value IV = 6 as the random values to be added and won in the additional lottery process. It is set, and 300 random values are set in the deviation result. As already explained, the number of random numbers that can be acquired from the lottery counter used in the additional lottery process is 400. Therefore, if an index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of being an additional winner in the additional lottery process is 1/4, and if an index value IV = 6 is won, the additional lottery process is performed. The probability of winning an additional prize is 1/4, and if the result is a loss, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process is 3/4.

Here, in the second RT mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "655", and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is "155". , The point value PV set to the index value IV = 16 is "655". On the other hand, in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table in the present embodiment, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "655", and the index value IV = 6 is set. The point value PV is "155", and the point value PV resulting from the deviation is "655". Then, when the probability of winning the additional lottery in the additional lottery process is expressed by the point value PV, it becomes 655 × 1/4 + 155 × 1/4 + 655 × 3/4 in the second RT mode, and in the normal mode and the first RT mode. It becomes 655 × 1/4 + 155 × 1/4 + 655 × 3/4. That is, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process is the same in the case of the second RT mode and the case of the normal mode and the first RT mode. As a result, even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode in the middle of the ART state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in terms of the probability of winning the additional prize. In addition, the number of continuous games given when the additional winning is won is constant. Therefore, even if the player falls into the normal mode or the first RT mode in the middle of the ART state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged with respect to the expected value of the number of continuous games to be added.

<Another form of the eighth embodiment>
-In the first addition table, all the number of winning values set to the index value IV = 16 is set in the second addition table for the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The configuration may be set for index values IV other than index values IV = 4 and 6, which are common to the lottery target in the normal mode and the first RT mode. For example, the configuration may be set for any of the index values IV = 1 to 3.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the trigger for adding the number of continuous games in the AT state is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table when the set value of “3” is set, and FIG. 48 is a stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the normal mode lottery table is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the order and the winning mode to be established.

As shown in FIG. 47, the index values IV = 1 to 3 are set to the same winning data as the index values IV = 1 to 3 of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. .. Further, the index values IV = 5 to 13 are set with the same winning data as the index values IV = 4 to 12 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. Only bell winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. Then, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 48, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode when the set value of “3” is set, and FIG. 50 shows reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the lottery table for the second mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of, and the winning mode established.

As shown in FIG. 49, the same winning data as the index values IV = 1 to 3 of the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment is set in the index values IV = 1 to 3. There is. Further, the index values IV = 5 to 16 are set to the same winning data as the index values IV = 4 to 15 of the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment. Only bell winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. Then, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 50, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

Although the description by illustration is omitted, only the bell winning data is set to the index value IV = 4 for the 1st RT mode lottery table as well as the normal mode lottery table and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, and the index. If the winning value is IV = 4, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, the index values IV = 1 to 3 are set to the same winning data as the index values IV = 1 to 3 of the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment, and the index values IV are set. The same winning data as the index values IV = 4 to 19 of the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is set in = 5 to 20.

Next, the special display unit 100 will be described.

The special display unit 100 is provided at a position below the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R in the game panel 20 of the front door 12. When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63, the special display unit 100 displays the contents corresponding to the notified contents. FIG. 51 (a) is a front view of the special display unit 100.

The special display unit 100 is provided with seven display segments 101 to 107. Each display segment 101 to 107 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment 101 to 107. At the same time, it is possible to light any combination of display segments 101 to 107. Since all of the above individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 101 to 107, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Different colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 101 to 107, or a plurality of types of colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 101 to 107. The first to seventh display segments 101 to 107 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 101 to 107 are arranged so as to form a so-called 7-segment display. As a result, the special display unit 100 can display a plurality of types such as numbers "0" to "9" and alphabet "H". The special display unit 100 is not limited to the configuration of the segment display as described above, and if it is possible to display a plurality of types of symbols, numbers or characters, a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display. Other types of display devices such as devices, CRTs, dot matrices, etc. may be used.

In this slot machine 10, if a player wins at any of the index values IV = 1 to 3, a bell prize is generated when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order. Further, when the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed using the lottery table for normal mode (FIGS. 47 and 48), the reel 32L is won when any of the index values IV = 10 to 13 is won. When the 1st RT replay winning is established when the stop order of, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order and the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed using the lottery table for the 1st RT mode, the index value IV = If any of 10 to 13 is won, the second RT replay winning is established when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order. Further, when the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed using the lottery table for the first RT mode, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped when the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 14 to 19. When the order becomes a predetermined stop order, the normal replay prize is established, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize is established. Further, when the lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed using the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIGS. 49 and 50), if the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 10 to 15, the reel When the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order, the normal replay prize is established, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is established.

In such a configuration in which the winning mode is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the first stop is the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be notified by the image display device 63. The left reel 32L and the second stop and third stop reels 32L, 32M, 32R have an arbitrary stop order, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop and third stop reels 32L, 32M. , 32R type is arbitrary stop order, 1st stop is right reel 32R, 2nd stop and 3rd stop reels 32L, 32M, 32R type is arbitrary stop order, 1st stop is left The reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel. The stop order is 32M, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop. Is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the left reel 32L, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the left reel 32L and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. There is a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. There are a total of nine types of these stop orders. Further, although the details will be described later, when the winning is performed with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, only the bell winning data is set as the winning data, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each stop are set. Although the bell winning is established regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be notified by the image display device 63.

In the above configuration, the special display unit 100 performs a display corresponding to the content notified by the image display device 63 in relation to the winning combination. The display contents of the special display unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b).

The display content of the special display unit 100 is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the notification content of the above eight types of stop orders in the image display device 63, and is won with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state. In such a case, the stop order is set so as to be notified by the image display device 63. Specifically, the number "0" is set as the display content in correspondence with the notification that the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary by the image display device 63. , The number "1" is set as the display content in response to the notification that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is arbitrary by the image display device 63, and the first stop. Is the right reel 32R, and the number "2" is set as the display content in response to the notification indicating that the rest is arbitrary by the image display device 63, and the first stop is the left reel 32L. The number "3" is set as the display content in response to the notification that the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R is performed by the image display device 63. In correspondence with the notification that the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the image display device 63 is "4". The number is set as the display content, and the image display device 63 notifies that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The number "5" is set as the display content in response to the above, indicating that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The number "6" is set as the display content corresponding to the notification being performed by the image display device 63, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop. The number "7" is set as the display content in response to the notification indicating that is the middle reel 32M being performed by the image display device 63, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop. The number "8" is set as the display content in response to the notification indicating that is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L on the image display device 63, and the index value IV. The letter "H" is set as the display content in correspondence with the winning at = 4.

Since the display contents of the special display unit 100 are set as described above, the display contents of the special display unit 100 do not overlap between the different types of notification contents in the image display device 63. As a result, the display content of the special display unit 100 can be associated with the notification content of the image display device 63. The display content of the special display unit 100 is not limited to a configuration in which the display content of the special display unit 100 is set to have a one-to-one correspondence with each of the above notification contents in the image display device 63, and a part of each of the above notification contents or A plurality of types of display contents of the special display unit 100 may be set to correspond to all of them. Even in this case, the display content of the special display unit 100 can be associated with the notification content of the image display device 63 by preventing the display content of the special display unit 100 from overlapping between different types of notification content. It will be possible.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the notification content in the image display device 63 and the display content in the special display unit 100.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 52 (a1), the image display device 63 has the same number of stop operations required to end the game. The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and the image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, the left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Further, in FIG. 52 (a1), the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , The image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image G1, and the image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G2. , The image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

In the image display device 63, an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed as described above, whereas in the special display unit 100, as shown in FIG. 52 (a2), the reel is displayed. "5" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to each unit display image G1 to G3 are stopped in the stop order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the special display unit 100 performs a display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the special display unit 100 displays the notification contents of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display contents on the image display device 63.

Similarly, when notifying the type of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped first, as shown in FIG. 52 (b1), the image display device 63 includes the left unit display image G4 corresponding to the left reel 32L and the left unit display image G4. The middle unit display image G5 corresponding to the middle reel 32M and the right unit display image G6 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Then, in FIG. 52 (b1), since the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary, the left unit display image G4 shows. Does not display the image corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G5, and the right reel is displayed on the right unit display image G6. The image corresponding to the stop order of 32R is not displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b2), the special display unit 100 displays "1" corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Here, the display range of the special display unit 100 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. This makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display unit 100 as compared with the image display device 63. Further, the special display unit 100 exists on the side opposite to the image display device 63 side with the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible. As a result, the special display unit 100 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display unit 100.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a notification control process executed in step S411 of the lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72.

In the notification control process, when the winning is achieved by any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 (step S2201: YES), the condition is that the value of the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2202: YES), the setting process of the first display data is executed (step S2203). In the first display data setting process, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of display content data corresponding to the stop order that enables the occurrence of the bell prize at the index value IV won this time. To grasp. Then, the data of the grasped type of display content is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and the display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the generation of the bell winning is started on the special display unit 100.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2204). The notification execution command is a command for causing the production side MPU 82 to recognize that the notification related to the winning combination should be executed in this game, and the stop order command is the reels 32L, 32M, which should be notified in this game. This is a command for causing the effector MPU 82 to recognize the stop order of 32R. Only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set as a transmission target regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. The stop order command is set so as to correspond one-to-one with the type of stop order notified by the image display device 63, and in step S2204, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can generate a bell prize. The stop order command corresponding to is read from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2204 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the notification control process, when the winning combination that enables the generation of the first RT replay winning or the winning combination that enables the generation of the second RT replay winning is won (step S2205: YES), the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 When the value is "1" or "2" (step S2206: YES), the first display data setting process is executed (step S2207). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, if the winning combination that enables the generation of the first RT replay prize is won, the first RT replay prize can be generated. If the type of data of the display content corresponding to the stop order to be performed is grasped and the role that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay prize is won, the stop order that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay prize is supported. Understand the type of data displayed. Then, the data of the grasped type of display content is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and the display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the generation of the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is started on the special display unit 100.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2208). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. Regarding the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the generation of the winning combination of the 1st RT replay winning and the 2nd RT replay winning combination is the main side. It is read from the ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2208 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the notification control process, when the winning combination that enables the generation of the first fall replay winning or the winning combination that enables the generation of the second falling replay winning is won (step S2209: YES), the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 When the value of is "2", or when the value of the AT status counter is "1" and the second RT mode is not set (step S2210: YES, step S2211: NO), the setting process of the first display data is executed. (Step S2212). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, if the winning combination that enables the generation of the first fall replay prize is won, the occurrence of the first fall replay prize is generated. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the second fall replay prize if the type of data of the display content corresponding to the stop order that can be avoided is grasped and the role that enables the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is won. Understand the type of display content data that corresponds to the stop order. Then, the data of the grasped type of display content is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and the display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of the first fall replay winning or the second falling replay winning, is started on the special display unit 100.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2213). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. Regarding the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the winning combination on the side corresponding to the winning combination of the first fall replay winning and the second falling replay winning. Is read from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2213 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In addition, when the value of the AT status counter is "1", it is the ART preparation state, and in the ART preparation state, when the second RT mode is set, the role that enables the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is won. Even if this is done, by configuring the configuration so that the stop order that can avoid the occurrence of the second fall replay winning is not notified, an opportunity to shift to the first RT mode occurs when the ART preparation state is started in the second RT mode. It becomes possible to make it. The transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state occurs when the transition from the first RT mode to the second RT mode occurs. Therefore, when the ART preparation state is started in the second RT mode, the transition to the first RT mode is performed once. It is possible to secure an opportunity to generate an opportunity to shift from the ART preparation state to the ART state.

In the notification control process, a dummy notification process is executed in addition to the above-mentioned various processes (step S2214). The dummy notification process will be described later.

Next, the notification process executed by the effect side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. The notification process is executed, for example, in a cycle of 4 msec.

When both the notification execution command and the stop order command are received from the main MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the image display device 63 displays an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop order command. Set the data required for display (step S2302). However, at this timing, the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 84 (step S2303). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation, and is set to, for example, 0.5 msec. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started.

In the notification process, when the notification delay period measured by using the measurement counter of the effect side RAM 84 has elapsed (step S2304: YES), the notification start process is executed (step S2305). In the notification start process, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S2302. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a1) and 52 (b1), for example, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63.

In the notification process, other processes are executed (step S2306). In other processing, for example, when a game end command is received from the main MPU 72, an image that ends the display of the image finally displayed on the image display device 63 in that game and waits for the start of the next game. Starts displaying. In this case, if the game end command is received while the image notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed, the display of the image notifying the stop order is ended.

Next, the addition process for executing the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. In addition, the addition process is not limited to the ART state, but is a situation in which the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more after the transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state, and the game has fallen to either the first RT mode or the normal mode. It is also executed in. Every time one game is digested, even if the value of the ART game counter is 1 or more after the transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state and the game falls to either the 1st RT mode or the normal mode. Since the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted, the addition process is executed correspondingly even in the relevant situation.

In the addition process, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state is won (step S2401: YES), the addition lottery process is executed (step S2402). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is read in the main RAM 74, and the value of the lottery counter is read out from the main ROM 73. Match against the table. The contents of the additional lottery table will be described later. When the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S2403: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2404). As a result, the number of continuous games in the ART state will increase.

Next, the dummy notification process executed in step S2214 of the notification control process (FIG. 53) on the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56.

When the value of the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 is "1" or "2" and the index value IV = 4 is won in this game (step S2501 and step S2502: YES), the current setting. While reading the value (step S2503), the dummy notification table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2504). Then, the dummy notification lottery process is executed (step S2505). In the dummy notification lottery process, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the value of the read lottery counter is set to the current set value in the read dummy notification table. Match against the corresponding information group.

When the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process (step S2506: YES), the second display data setting process is executed (step S2507). In the second display data setting process, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of display content data corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is grasped. Then, the data of the grasped type of display content is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and the display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is started on the special display unit 100.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2508). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. Regarding the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected in the dummy notification lottery process this time is read from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2508 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Incidentally, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, information on the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display unit 100 selected in step S2505 is set.

Next, the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continuous games in the ART state and the set value, and the relationship between the execution mode of the dummy notification and the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b). FIG. 57 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continuous games in the ART state and the set value, and FIG. 57 (b) explains the relationship between the execution mode of the dummy notification and the set value. It is explanatory drawing for this.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the index value IV in the non-BB state that triggers the execution of the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games in the ART state is any of "1", "2", and "3". .. The winning probabilities in the lottery process (FIG. 10) for the combinations with index values IV = 1 to 3 are the same. In addition, the winning probabilities in the lottery process (FIG. 10) for the combinations with index values IV = 1 to 3 are common to all settings. Specifically, the point value PV set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is "10000" in all the set values. As a result, in the non-AT state, the probability of winning the bell is the same regardless of which of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop, and the index value IV = in the AT state. Winnings of 1 to 3 will occur evenly.

In addition, the odds of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won are also the same, and the winning probabilities are all set. It is common. Specifically, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won is 1/10 in all the set values. There is. As described above, since the winning probabilities of the index values IV = 1 to 3 are also the same, the probabilities of winning any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and further winning in the additional lottery process are mutual. Is the same as. In addition, since both the winning probability of the index value IV = 1 to 3 and the probability of winning the additional winning in the additional lottery process are common to all settings, the probability that the number of continuous games in the ART state will be added is common to all settings. is there. Furthermore, the number of games to be added when an additional winning is won in the additional lottery process is also common to all settings. As a result, the expected value of the number of continuous games added in the ART state is also common to all settings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state.

In a configuration in which the probabilities of winning any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 as described above and further winning in the additional lottery process are the same, and the probabilities are the same for all the set values. , When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state in the ART preparation state or the ART state, the image display device 63 executes dummy notification. The dummy notification indicates that the left reel 32L is first stopped when the winning is won at the index value IV = 4, which means that the bell winning is established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The notification, the notification instructing the middle reel 32M to be first stopped, and the notification instructing the right reel 32R to be first stopped are intentionally executed.

In the image for executing the dummy notification instructing to stop the left reel 32L for the first time, the left reel 32L is first stopped in order to enable the establishment of the bell winning when the index value IV = 1 is won. It is the same as the image for executing the notification instructing to stop. Further, in the image for executing the dummy notification instructing to stop the middle reel 32M for the first time, the middle reel 32M is used to enable the establishment of the bell winning when the index value IV = 2 is won. It is the same as the image for executing the notification instructing the first stop. Further, in the image for executing the dummy notification instructing to stop the right reel 32R for the first time, the right reel 32R is used to enable the establishment of the bell winning when the index value IV = 3 is won. It is the same as the image for executing the notification instructing the first stop. By executing the dummy notification in this way, the probabilities of winning any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 as described above and further winning in the additional lottery process are the same as each other, and the probability is the same. In a configuration where the probabilities are the same for all set values, the frequency with which the number of continuous games in the ART state is added when any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified as the first stop and the bell prize is established is calculated. It can be changed as appropriate.

The relationship between the execution mode of the dummy notification and the set value will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 57 (b).

The probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state differs between the settings of "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "7000", and when the set value is "2", the index value IV = 4 When the point value PV is set to "8000" and the set value is "3", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "9000" and the set value is "4". The point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "10000", and when the set value is "5", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "11000". When the set value is "6", the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "12000". As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state.

Although the probability that dummy notification will be executed when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won is common to all settings, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected as dummy notification is selected. Aspects differ between the settings of "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and the left reel 32L is the first dummy notification. The probability that the notification to stop is executed, the probability that the notification that first stops the middle reel 32M is executed as a dummy notification, and the probability that the notification that first stops the right reel 32R is executed as a dummy notification are the same. It is 1/5. When the set value is "2", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the left reel is used as the dummy notification. Only the notification for first stopping the 32L is executed, and the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M and the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R are not executed as dummy notifications. When the set value is "3", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the middle reel is used as the dummy notification. Only the notification for first stopping the 32M is executed, and the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L and the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R are not executed as dummy notifications. When the set value is "4", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the right reel is used as the dummy notification. Only the notification for first stopping the 32R is executed, and the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L and the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M are not executed as dummy notifications. When the set value is "5", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the left reel is used as the dummy notification. The probability that the notification for first stopping the 32L is executed and the probability for executing the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M as a dummy notification are 3/10, which are the same as each other, and the right reel 32R is the first. The notification to be stopped is not executed as a dummy notification. When the set value is "6", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 3/5, and when the dummy notification is won, the middle reel is used as the dummy notification. The probability that the notification for first stopping the 32M is executed and the probability for executing the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification are 3/10, which are the same as each other, and the left reel 32L is the first. The notification to be stopped is not executed as a dummy notification.

In a configuration in which the probabilities of winning any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and further winning in the additional lottery process are the same, and the probabilities are the same for all set values, the addition is executed. If a dummy notification is executed when the index value IV = 4 that does not trigger the winning is executed, the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which are easily selected as the dummy notification, is generated and the bell prize is generated. In some cases, the frequency of additions will decrease. That is, when the set value is "1", the probability of being selected as a dummy notification is the same for each other in the three types of stop orders, so the frequency at which the addition occurs when the bell prize is established is the reel. It is the same between the stop orders of 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, when the set value is "2", only the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as a dummy notification, so that the frequency at which the addition occurs when the bell winning is established is the left reel 32L. Only the stop order in which the first stop is made is lowered. Further, when the set value is "3", only the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M is executed as a dummy notification, so that the frequency at which the addition occurs when the bell winning is established is the middle reel 32M. Only the stop order in which the first stop is made is lowered. Further, when the set value is "4", only the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed as a dummy notification, so that the frequency at which the addition occurs when the bell winning is established is the right reel 32R. Only the stop order in which the first stop is made is lowered. Further, when the set value is "5", the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is not executed as a dummy notification, so that the right reel 32R is the first to be added when the bell winning is established. 1 Only the stop order to stop is higher. Further, when the set value is "6", the notification of first stopping the left reel 32L as a dummy notification is not executed, so that the frequency of addition occurring when the bell winning is established is the left reel 32L. 1 Only the stop order to stop is higher.

With the above configuration, the probabilities of winning any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and further winning in the additional lottery process are the same, and the probabilities are the same for all the set values. Even with a certain configuration, the addition occurs when the bell winning is established because the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which reduces the frequency of addition, differs between the set values. By grasping the frequency of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the case, the player can predict the set value.

In the configuration in which the image display device 63 executes dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the special display unit 100 is a dummy when the index value IV = 4 is won. Regardless of the type of notification, the notification corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the dummy notification is executed by checking the special display unit 100. In particular, since the special display unit 100 is directly controlled by the main MPU 72, it is possible to increase the credibility of the display.

Further, as described above, when the special display unit 100 wins at the index value IV = 4, the notification corresponding to the winning at the index value IV = 4 is executed regardless of the type of dummy notification. Even so, the special display unit 100 has a narrower display range than the image display device 63 and exists at a position less conspicuous than the image display device 63. That is, the special display unit 100 has a lower degree of attention of the player than the image display device 63. As a result, even if the above-mentioned display is performed on the special display unit 100, it is possible to prevent the game playability already described from being impaired.

<Another form of the ninth embodiment>
-In a configuration in which a profit other than the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state can be given as a result of winning any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state, for such a configuration The characteristic configuration of the ninth embodiment may be applied. As another benefit, for example, when the index value IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state is won in the AT state, the player shifts to the advantageous state in which the advantageous situation continues for the predetermined number of games. The characteristic configuration of the ninth embodiment may be applied to the configuration.

-When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined mode, the types of winning combinations for which the bell prize is established are not the three types of index values IV = 1 to 3, but the reels 32L which are the first stop and the second stop. , 32M, 32R may be set to the same 6 types as the maximum number of patterns when they are defined. That is, a pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, a pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is A pattern in which the middle reel is 32M and the second stop is the left reel 32L, a pattern in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and a pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R. A pattern in which the second stop is the left reel 32L and a pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M may be configured. In this case, if a dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, any of the above 6 patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Become.

-When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined mode, the type of winning combination for winning the bell is not the three types of index values IV = 1 to 3, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The configuration may be such that nine types are set, which is the same as the maximum number of patterns to be obtained. That is, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is an arbitrary pattern, the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is an arbitrary pattern, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is an arbitrary pattern. The first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel. A pattern in which the second stop is 32M and the second stop is the left reel 32L, a pattern in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and a pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop. A pattern in which the stop is the left reel 32L and a pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M may be set. In this case, if a dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, any of the above nine patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Become.

-If the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the probability of winning the dummy notification is not limited to the same set value of "1" to "6", and is "1". The configuration may be different depending on the setting values of ~ "6". For example, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the dummy notification, or the smaller the set value, the lower the probability of winning the dummy notification. In addition, the group with the smaller setting value (setting value of "1", "2" and "3") and the group with the larger setting value (setting value of "4", "5" and "6") Therefore, the probability of winning the dummy notification may be different. Further, the probability of winning the dummy notification may differ between the even-numbered set value and the odd-numbered set value.

-The probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is not limited to a configuration in which the probability of winning increases as the set value increases, and may be configured to decrease as the set value increases. Further, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state may be the same or substantially the same between the set values of "1" to "6". Even in this case, the reels 32L, 32M, 32M, because the type of stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which are notified or easily notified when the dummy notification is won, are different depending on the set value. The player can predict the set value from the frequency of occurrence of the addition when the stop order of 32R is notified and the bell winning is established.

-The additional lottery process may be executed even when the player wins at any of the index values IV = 5 to 7. As a result, even if the bell winning is not established, it is possible to give an opportunity to add the number of continuous games.

-When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification process (FIG. 56), and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63. The special display unit 100 is not limited to the configuration in which the display corresponding to the index value IV = 4 is performed only in the case, and when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the reel 32L, Regardless of whether or not the stop order of 32M and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, the special display unit 100 may display the index value IV = 4.

The special display unit 100 may be provided in the display unit for notifying other information such as the credit display unit 65 or the grant number display unit 66. For example, the target display unit, which is one of the credit display unit 65 and the grant number display unit 66, divides the outer edge of the target display unit, and the notification light emission for notifying the information of the notification target of the target display unit. In the configuration including the unit, the special display unit 100 may be arranged at a position adjacent to the notification light emitting unit in the area partitioned by the partition frame portion of the target display unit. In this case, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display unit 100.

The special display unit 100 may also be used as a display unit for notifying other information such as the credit display unit 65 or the grant number display unit 66. In this case, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display unit 100.

-The special display unit 100 is set with the same number of unit display units as the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R that affect the winning result, and each unit display unit corresponds to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It may be configured to execute the display. In this case, the special display unit 100 also executes the notification that enables the player to clearly grasp the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as in the image display device 63.

The device for executing the notification of the stop mode under the control of the effect side MPU 82 is not limited to the image display device 63, and is used in place of or in addition to the image display device 63 to notify the stop mode. The dedicated light emitting unit may be controlled by the effect side MPU 82 to execute the notification of the stop mode, or the speaker 62 may be controlled by the effect side MPU 82 to execute the notification of the stop mode. ..

-When any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the bell winning is established when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined stop order, but any of the reels 32L , 32M, 32R may be configured such that the bell winning is established when the stop operation timing is a predetermined stop operation timing. That is, when the index value IV = 1 is won, for example, when the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is the first stop operation timing, the bell prize is established, but when it is not the first stop operation timing, the bell is established. Winning is not established. Further, when the index value IV = 2 is won, for example, when the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is the second stop operation timing, the bell prize is established, while when it is not the second stop operation timing, the bell is established. Winning is not established. Further, when the index value IV = 3 is won, for example, when the stop operation timing of the left reel 32L is the third stop operation timing, the bell prize is established, while when it is not the third stop operation timing, the bell is established. Winning is not established. In this case, in the AT state, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the stop operation timing that enables the establishment of the bell winning corresponding to the winning index value is notified. Further, when the index value IV = 4 is won and the dummy notification is won, the first stop operation timing to the third stop operation timing are notified. However, if the index value IV = 4 is won, the bell winning will be established regardless of the stop operation timing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

-The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the set value can be predicted by the execution mode of the dummy notification, and the configuration may be such that the prediction of the advantage other than the set value can be predicted by the execution mode of the dummy notification. For example, in a configuration in which a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode exist as in the second embodiment, the execution mode of dummy notification in the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode is as in the ninth embodiment. By making the difference between the above and the above, the player may be made to predict whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode from the execution mode of the dummy notification.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and the configuration of the dummy notification table are different from those of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the execution mode of the dummy notification and the set value.

Unlike the ninth embodiment, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is common to all settings. Specifically, the point value PV of the index value IV = 4 is set to "9000" regardless of the set values of "1" to "6". This point value PV is lower than the point value PV (specifically, “10000”) set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 in the non-BB state. Therefore, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is lower than the probability of winning each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 regardless of the set values of "1" to "6". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 is any of the set values of "1" to "6", and each winning probability of an index value IV = 1-3. It may be a higher probability than, or it may be the same probability.

The probability that the dummy notification will be executed when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won differs between the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/2 when the index value IV = 4 is won, and the set value is "1". If it is "2", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/2 when the index value IV = 4 is won, and if the set value is "3", the index is indexed. When the value IV = 4 is won, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 2/3, and when the set value is "4", the index value IV = 4 is won. In such a case, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 2/3, and when the set value is "5", the dummy notification lottery process is performed when the index value IV = 4 is won. The probability of winning the dummy notification is 4/5, and when the set value is "6", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process when the index value IV = 4 is won is It is 6/7. That is, when the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process increases as the set value increases. Therefore, the larger the set value, the lower the probability that the bell winning will occur and the number of continuous games in the ART state will be added in the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63. .. As a result, the player can grasp the frequency with which the bell winning occurs and the number of continuous games in the ART state is added under the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63. Can predict the set value.

The mutual selection ratio between the stop orders of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected as the dummy notification in each set value is the same as that of the ninth embodiment.

<Another form of the tenth embodiment>
-The probability of winning at an index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is not limited to the same configuration between the set values of "1" to "6", and may be substantially the same configuration. Further, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state may be increased as the set value is increased, or may be decreased as the set value is increased.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games in the ART state is different from the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the addition process.

In the addition process, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state (step S2601: YES), the addition lottery process is executed (step S2602). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is read in the main RAM 74, and the value of the lottery counter is read out from the main ROM 73. Match against the table. The contents of the additional lottery table will be described later. When the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S2603: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2604). As a result, the number of continuous games in the ART state will increase.

Next, the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continuous games in the ART state and the set value, and the relationship between the execution mode of the dummy notification and the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). FIG. 60 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continuous games in the ART state and the set value, and FIG. 60 (b) explains the relationship between the execution mode of the dummy notification and the set value. It is explanatory drawing for this.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the index value IV in the non-BB state, which triggers the execution of the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games in the ART state, is “4”. That is, in the present embodiment, the index value IV = 4, in which the bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, triggers the execution of the additional lottery process, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is predetermined. The index values IV = 1 to 3 in which the bell winning is established when the stop order is reached do not trigger the execution of the additional lottery process. In addition, the winning probability of the index value IV = 4 is common to all settings. Specifically, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "9000" in all the settings. In addition, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed when the index value IV = 4 is won is also common to all settings. Specifically, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process is 1/2 in all settings. As a result, the probability that the number of continuous games in the ART state will be added is common to all settings. Furthermore, since the number of games to be added when the game is added and won in the additional lottery process is also common to all settings, the expected value of the number of continuous games to be added in the ART state is also common to all settings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the probability that the dummy notification will be executed when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won differs between the set values of "1" to "6". There is. Specifically, when the set value is "1", when the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/3, and the set value is When it is "2", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/2 when the index value IV = 4 is won, and when the set value is "3", the probability of winning the dummy notification is 1/2. When the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 2/3, and when the set value is "4", the index value IV = 4 is won. In that case, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 4/5, and when the set value is "5", the dummy notification lottery process is performed when the index value IV = 4 is won. If the set value is "6" and the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 6/7. Is. That is, when the index value IV = 4 is won, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process increases as the set value is larger, except when the set value is "5". Therefore, except when the setting value is "5", a bell prize is generated in the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, and the number of continuous games in the ART state is added. The probability of occurrence increases as the set value increases. As a result, the player can grasp the frequency with which the bell winning occurs and the number of continuous games in the ART state is added under the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63. , It is possible to predict the set value.

With the set value of "5", the dummy notification is not executed when the index value IV = 4 is won. Therefore, when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, the event that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added does not occur at all. Is more likely to have a set value of "5". As a result, the player's attention to the fact that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified in the image display device 63. It is possible to increase the degree.

In the configuration in which the dummy notification is executed with the set values other than "5", the execution mode of the dummy notification differs between the set values of "1" to "4" and "6". Specifically, when the set value is "1", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 1/3, and the left reel 32L is the first dummy notification. The probability that the notification to stop is executed and the probability that the notification to first stop the middle reel 32M is executed as a dummy notification are 1/6 of the same, and the notification to stop the right reel 32R first is Not executed as a dummy notification. When the set value is "2", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 1/2, and when the dummy notification is won, the left reel is used as the dummy notification. Only the notification for first stopping the 32L is executed, and the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M and the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R are not executed as dummy notifications. When the set value is "3", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 2/3, and when the dummy notification is won, the middle reel is used as the dummy notification. Only the notification for first stopping the 32M is executed, and the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L and the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R are not executed as dummy notifications. When the set value is "4", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 4/5, and the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification. The probability that the notification is performed and the probability that the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M is executed as a dummy notification are 2/5 of each other, and the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is not executed as a dummy notification. .. When the set value is "6", the probability of winning the dummy notification when the index value IV = 4 is won is 6/7, and when the dummy notification is won, the right reel is used as the dummy notification. Only the notification for first stopping the 32R is executed, and the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L and the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M are not executed as dummy notifications.

With the above configuration, when the index value IV = 4 is won in the set value of "1" or the set value of "4", the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M as a dummy notification are performed. Only the first stop notification is executed. Therefore, when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L and the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M are executed in the image display device 63, the number of continuous games in the ART state is added. On the other hand, when the event that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added does not occur when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed in the image display device 63. Is more likely that the set value is "1" or "4".

In the set value of "2", when the index value IV = 4 is won, only the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as a dummy notification. Therefore, when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed in the image display device 63, an event occurs in which the number of continuous games in the ART state is added, while the image display device 63 In the case where the notification that the middle reel 32M is first stopped and the notification that the right reel 32R is first stopped is executed and the bell prize is generated, the event that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added does not occur. Is more likely that the set value is "2".

In the set value of "3", when the index value IV = 4 is won, only the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M is executed as a dummy notification. Therefore, when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M is executed in the image display device 63, an event occurs in which the number of continuous games in the ART state is added, while the image display device 63 In the case where the notification that the left reel 32L is first stopped and the notification that the right reel 32R is first stopped is executed and the bell winning occurs, the event that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added does not occur. Is more likely that the set value is "3".

In the set value of "6", when the index value IV = 4 is won, only the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed as a dummy notification. Therefore, when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed in the image display device 63, an event occurs in which the number of continuous games in the ART state is added, while the image display device 63 In the case where the notification that the left reel 32L is first stopped and the notification that the middle reel 32M is first stopped is executed and the bell prize is generated, the event that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added does not occur. Is more likely that the set value is "6".

In particular, the event that the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification is executed occurs only when the set value is "6". Then, if a bell winning occurs in the situation where the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed in the image display device 63, and an event occurs in which the number of continuous games in the ART state is added, at that time. It will be confirmed that the set value is "6". As a result, when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed in the image display device 63, the player's response to the event that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

Here, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 61, in the case of the present embodiment, the stop order when the right reel 32R is first stopped and the second stop and third stop reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arbitrary. The display of the special display unit 100 in the above is "6". That is, when an index value IV = 3 is won in the AT state and the stop order for first stopping the right reel 32R is notified on the image display device 63, "6" is displayed on the special display unit 100. Become. The number "6" is an event in which the number of continuous games in the ART state is added when a bell prize is generated under the condition that the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed in the image display device 63. It corresponds to "6", which is a set value that can occur. As a result, the player who has confirmed the display of the special display unit 100 when the stop order for first stopping the right reel 32R in the image display device 63 is notified and the bell prize is established is subsequently displayed on the image display device 63. It is recognized that the set value is "6" by confirming the event that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added when the bell winning occurs in the situation where the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 and the dummy notification is executed, "H" is displayed on the special display unit 100 regardless of the type of the dummy notification. As a result, the special display unit 100 was confirmed in the game in which the bell prize was generated and the number of continuous games in the ART state was added under the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was notified in the image display device 63. Even so, it is possible to prevent the set value from being grasped.

Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 3, if the image display device 63 is in the AT state, the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed, but it is assumed that the bell winning is established. However, the event that the number of continuous games in the ART state is added does not occur. As a result, even if the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R is executed in the image display device 63 and a bell prize is generated, it is possible to cause a situation in which the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state is not executed. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R on the display device 63.

<Another form of the eleventh embodiment>
-In a configuration in which a profit other than the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state can be given as a result of winning the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the eleventh implementation of the above is performed for such a configuration. The characteristic configuration of the form may be applied. As another benefit, for example, in the configuration where the player wins the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state in the AT state and shifts to the advantageous state in which the favorable situation for the player continues for a predetermined number of games, the above-mentioned The characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment may be applied.

-When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined mode, the types of winning combinations for which the bell prize is established are not the three types of index values IV = 1 to 3, but the reels 32L which are the first stop and the second stop. , 32M, 32R may be set to the same 6 types as the maximum number of patterns when they are defined. That is, a pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, a pattern in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is A pattern in which the middle reel is 32M and the second stop is the left reel 32L, a pattern in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and a pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R. A pattern in which the second stop is the left reel 32L and a pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M may be configured.

In this case, if a dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, any of the above 6 patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It becomes. Further, in the configuration, the number of types of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified when the bell winning is established is equal to or greater than the number of types of the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified when the dummy notification is won may be different for each of the set values of "1" to "6". In this case, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the bell winning is established and the number of continuous games is added, the type of stop order of the notified reels 32L, 32M, 32R is used. It is possible to uniquely specify the set value. Further, in the configuration, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the set value are won when the winning combination of the bell prize is established. When the stop order of is notified by the image display device 63, the number corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the special display unit 100.

-When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a predetermined mode, the type of winning combination for winning the bell is not the three types of index values IV = 1 to 3, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The configuration may be such that nine types are set, which is the same as the maximum number of patterns to be obtained. That is, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is an arbitrary pattern, the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is an arbitrary pattern, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is an arbitrary pattern. The first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel. A pattern in which the second stop is 32M and the second stop is the left reel 32L, a pattern in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel 32R, and a pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop. A pattern in which the stop is the left reel 32L and a pattern in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M may be set. In this case, if a dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, any of the above nine patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Become.

In this case, if a dummy notification is won when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, one of the above nine patterns is notified as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It becomes. Further, in the configuration, the number of types of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified when the bell winning is established is equal to or greater than the number of types of the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified when the dummy notification is won may be different for each of the set values of "1" to "6". In this case, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the bell winning is established and the number of continuous games is added, the type of stop order of the notified reels 32L, 32M, 32R is used. It is possible to uniquely specify the set value. Further, in the configuration, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the set value are won when the winning combination of the bell prize is established. When the stop order of is notified by the image display device 63, the number corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the special display unit 100.

-If the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the probability of winning the dummy notification is not limited to different configurations with the set values of "1" to "6", and "1" to "" The configuration may be the same or substantially the same with the set value of "6". In this case, when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won, the probability of not winning the dummy notification is the same or substantially the same at the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, the reels 32L, 32M, Even if the frequency at which the bell winning is established and the number of continuous games is added without being notified of the stop order of 32R is grasped, the set value cannot be predicted. Therefore, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and the bell winning is established, the player is in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which is the notification target when the number of continuous games is added. Can be noticed.

-When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, the probability of winning the dummy notification may be lowered as the set value becomes larger. In addition, the group with the smaller setting value (setting value of "1", "2" and "3") and the group with the larger setting value (setting value of "4", "5" and "6") Therefore, the probability of winning the dummy notification may be different. Further, the probability of winning the dummy notification may differ between the even-numbered set value and the odd-numbered set value.

-The additional lottery process may be executed even when the player wins at any of the index values IV = 5 to 7. As a result, even if the bell winning is not established, it is possible to give an opportunity to add the number of continuous games.

-For an index value IV whose combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when a prize is established does not overlap with another index value IV, a configuration that enables prediction of a set value using dummy notification may be applied. For example, in a configuration in which a bell prize is established only when a predetermined index value IV is won, a dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process executed when the predetermined index value IV is won. The notification may be executed. In this case, in the dummy notification, when the bell winning is established by preventing the predetermined stop order from being the notification target at the predetermined set value while the predetermined stop order is not the notification target at the specific set value. It is possible to predict the set value from the type of dummy notification of.

<12th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opportunity for the dummy notification lottery process to be executed is different from that of the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the addition process.

In the addition process, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state (step S2701: YES), the addition lottery process is executed (step S2702). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is read in the main RAM 74, and the value of the lottery counter is read out from the main ROM 73. Match against the table. The content of the additional lottery table is the same as that of the eleventh embodiment. When the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S2703: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2704). As a result, the number of continuous games in the ART state will increase.

When the additional winning is not achieved in the additional lottery process (step S2703: NO), the current set value is read (step S2705) and the dummy notification table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2706). Then, the dummy notification lottery process is executed (step S2707). In the dummy notification lottery process, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the value of the read lottery counter is set to the current set value in the read dummy notification table. Match against the corresponding information group.

When the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process (step S2708: YES), the second display data setting process is executed (step S2709). In the second display data setting process, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of display content data corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is grasped. Then, the data of the grasped type of display content is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and the display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is started on the special display unit 100.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2710). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. Regarding the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected in the dummy notification lottery process this time is read from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2710 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Incidentally, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, information on the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display unit 100 selected in step S2707 is set.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a dummy notification table.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the additional lottery process does not result in the additional winning, the dummy notification lottery process is executed. In this case, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process increases as the set value increases. On the other hand, at each set value, a notification instructing the left reel 32L to be first stopped, a notification instructing the middle reel 32M to be first stopped, and a notification instructing the right reel 32R to be first stopped. The mutual selection ratio is the same. Specifically, when the set value is "1", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/10, and the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification. The probability, the probability that the notification that first stops the middle reel 32M as a dummy notification is executed, and the probability that the notification that first stops the right reel 32R is executed as a dummy notification are 1/10 of each other. .. When the set value is "2", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/3, and the probability that the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification is used as the dummy notification. The probability of executing the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M and the probability of executing the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification are 1/9 which are the same as each other. When the set value is "3", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/7, and the probability that the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification is used as the dummy notification. The probability of executing the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M and the probability of executing the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification are 1/7 which are the same as each other. When the set value is "4", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/5, and the probability that the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification is used as the dummy notification. The probability that the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M is executed and the probability that the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification is executed are 1/5 of the same. When the set value is "5", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/4, and the probability that the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification is used as the dummy notification. The probability of executing the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M and the probability of executing the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification are 1/4, which are the same as each other. When the set value is "6", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/1, and the probability that the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification is used as the dummy notification. The probability that the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M is executed and the probability that the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification is executed are 1/3 of the same.

With the above configuration, the frequency at which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63 and the bell winning is established increases as the set value increases. As a result, the player can predict the set value by notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 and grasping the frequency at which the bell winning is established.

<12th Embodiment>
-The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the dummy notification, and the larger the set value, the lower the probability of winning the dummy notification. In addition, the group with the smaller setting value (setting value of "1", "2" and "3") and the group with the larger setting value (setting value of "4", "5" and "6") ) And the probability of winning the dummy notification may be different. Further, the probability of winning the dummy notification may differ between the even-numbered set value and the odd-numbered set value.

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing the additional lottery process and the trigger for executing the dummy notification lottery process are different from those in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the addition process.

In the addition process, when the index value IV = 1 to 4 in the non-BB state is won (step S2801: YES), the addition lottery process is executed (step S2802). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is read in the main RAM 74, and the value of the lottery counter is read out from the main ROM 73. Match against the table. The contents of the additional lottery table will be described later. When the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S2803: YES), "50" is added as the number of additional games to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2804). As a result, the number of continuous games in the ART state will increase.

Further, when the additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process, the dummy notification can be executed on condition that the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4 in this game (step S2805: YES). Execute the processing for. Specifically, the current set value is read (step S2806), and the dummy notification table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2807). Then, the dummy notification lottery process is executed (step S2808). In the dummy notification lottery process, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the value of the read lottery counter is set to the current set value in the read dummy notification table. Match against the corresponding information group.

When the dummy notification is won in the dummy notification lottery process (step S2809: YES), the second display data setting process is executed (step S2810). In the second display data setting process, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of display content data corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is grasped. Then, the data of the grasped type of display content is read from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and the display control of the special display unit 100 is executed according to the read data of the display content. As a result, the display corresponding to the winning with the index value IV = 4 is started on the special display unit 100.

After that, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2811). As described above, only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. Regarding the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R selected in the dummy notification lottery process this time is read from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S2811 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Incidentally, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, information on the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display unit 100 selected in step S2808 is set.

FIG. 65A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the addition mode of the number of continuous games in the ART state and the set value.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the index value IV in the non-BB state, which triggers the execution of the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games in the ART state, is any of "1" to "4". The winning probabilities of index values IV = 1 to 3 are the same as each other, and the winning probabilities of index value IV = 4 are lower than the winning probabilities of index value IV = 4. In addition, the winning probabilities of these index values IV = 1 to 4 are common to all settings. Specifically, the point value PV set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is "10000" in all the set values. As a result, in the non-AT state, the probability of winning the bell is the same regardless of which of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop, and the index value IV = in the AT state. Winnings of 1 to 3 will occur evenly. Further, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is "9000" in all the set values.

The probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won is also the same, and the winning probability is common to all settings. It has become. Specifically, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won is 1/10 in all settings. .. As described above, since the winning probabilities of the index values IV = 1 to 3 are also the same, the probabilities of winning any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and further winning in the additional lottery process are mutual. Is the same as. In addition, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed when the index value IV = 4 is won is also common to all settings. Specifically, the probability of winning an additional prize in the additional lottery process executed when the index value IV = 4 is won is 1/4 in all settings.

Since both the winning probability of the index value IV = 1 to 4 and the probability of winning the additional winning in the additional lottery process are common to all settings, the probability that the number of continuous games in the ART state will be added is common to all settings. Furthermore, the number of games to be added when an additional winning is won in the additional lottery process is also common to all settings. As a result, the expected value of the number of continuous games added in the ART state is also common to all settings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings regarding the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state.

FIG. 65B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a dummy notification table.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the additional lottery process is performed, the dummy notification lottery process is executed. In this case, the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process decreases as the set value increases. On the other hand, at each set value, a notification instructing the left reel 32L to be first stopped, a notification instructing the middle reel 32M to be first stopped, and a notification instructing the right reel 32R to be first stopped. The mutual selection ratio is the same. Specifically, when the set value is "1" to "3", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 1/1, and the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L as a dummy notification , The probability that the notification that first stops the middle reel 32M as a dummy notification is executed, and the probability that the notification that first stops the right reel 32R is executed as a dummy notification are 1/3 of the same. It has become. When the set value is "4", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/5, and the probability that the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification is used as the dummy notification. The probability that the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M is executed and the probability that the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification is executed are 1/5 of the same. When the set value is "5", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/8, and the probability that the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification is used as the dummy notification. The probability of executing the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M and the probability of executing the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification are 1/8 which are the same as each other. When the set value is "6", the probability of winning the dummy notification in the dummy notification lottery process is 3/10, and the probability that the notification for first stopping the left reel 32L is executed as the dummy notification is used as the dummy notification. The probability of executing the notification for first stopping the middle reel 32M and the probability of executing the notification for first stopping the right reel 32R as a dummy notification are 1/10 of each other.

With the above configuration, when the set value is "1" to "3", the dummy notification is surely executed when the index value IV = 4 is won in the ART preparation state or the ART state. When the set value is "4" to "6", the dummy notification may not be executed even if the index value IV = 4 is won in the ART preparation state or the ART state. As a result, when the bell winning is established without notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63, it is confirmed that the set value is "4" or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the bell winning is established without notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, when the set value is "4" to "6", the probability that the dummy notification is executed when the index value IV = 4 is won decreases as the set value increases. Therefore, the higher the frequency with which the number of continuous games in the ART state is added, the larger the set value, when the bell winning is established without notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. It will be. Therefore, from this point as well, the player pays attention to whether or not the bell winning is established without notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63, and aims to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. Good. Further, the configuration described as another embodiment of the predetermined embodiment among the above embodiments may be applied to an embodiment different from the predetermined embodiment.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 are won in the game when the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state is won and the index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state is won. And the effect executed by the image display device 63 may be the same, or the selection mode of the effect may be the same. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from determining which of the index values IV = 4 and 5 is won from the content of the effect.

-In the first to eighth embodiments, the index values IV = 4 and 5 in the non-BB state correspond to the index values IV = 2 and 3 in the BB state, but the index values IV in the non-BB state. Even if the combination corresponding to = 4 and 5 is in the BB state, the index values IV = 4 and 5 may be set.

-As a predetermined profit, the transition to the AT state or the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state is made, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state may be a state that is advantageous to the player over a predetermined number of games and a transition to a state different from the AT state may occur, and the transition to an advantageous state such as an AT state, an RT state, and a so-called CT state may occur. The configuration may be such that a transition to a chance state in which the probability is high occurs, or a configuration in which a benefit of increasing the transition probability to an advantageous state when the transition to the chance state is given may be given.

-In the above embodiment, a configuration is provided in which a medal is paid out when a small winning combination is established. Good. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

-The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, and RT game, CT game or AT game may be applied. The invention may be applied to any slot machine, including the provided type.

-The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be composed even if these are combined. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

-In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played by using a game ball as a game medium, and the slot machine and the pachinko machine May be applied to a gaming machine of a fusion type.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S408 in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control for the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination. Execution means (function to execute the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72) and
A setting means (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the lottery process of the winning combination or the variable display of the pattern, a predetermined event (watermelon winning data is set in the first to fourth embodiments, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments). Predetermined profit granting means (first) that grants a predetermined profit (transition to AT state, addition of the number of continuous games in ART state) on the condition that the order is notified and a bell prize is established). In the fourth embodiment, the functions of step S141 to step S1412, step S1416, step S1504 to step S1505, step S1604 and step S1704 in the main MPU 72 are executed, and in the ninth to tenth embodiments, the main MPU 72 The function of executing the process of step S2404 in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 in the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment, thirteenth. In the embodiment of the above, the function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72) is provided.
The probability that the predetermined profit will be given is the same or substantially the same among the set values of the plurality of stages.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the predetermined event occurs differs between the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature A1, since a predetermined profit is given when a predetermined event occurs, the player plays the game while expecting the occurrence of the predetermined event. In this case, by making the probability that the predetermined profit is given the same or substantially the same among the set values of a plurality of stages, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage between the set values with respect to the giving of the predetermined profit. It will be possible. Further, the probability that a predetermined event occurs differs between the first set value and the second set value. In a configuration in which the probability of giving a predetermined profit is the same or substantially the same among the set values of a plurality of stages, the probability of occurrence of a predetermined event differs between the first set value and the second set value. The probability that a predetermined profit will be given to the occurrence of an event will differ between the first set value and the second set value. As a result, even if the configuration is such that there is no advantage or disadvantage between the set values regarding the granting of the predetermined profit, the set value is set for the player based on the probability that the predetermined profit is granted for the occurrence of the predetermined event. It becomes possible to predict.

Feature A2. In the predetermined event, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the first corresponding symbol (combination of watermelon symbols in the first to fourth embodiments), which is one of the combination of the predetermined symbol and the predetermined symbol, is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the combination is to be played, or a combination that enables the stop display of the first corresponding pattern is won in the lottery process of the combination.

According to the feature A2, by giving a predetermined profit based on the stop display of the first corresponding pattern, it is possible to draw the player's attention to stopping the variable display of the pattern, and the predetermined profit. It becomes possible to make the opportunity for which is given to be easy for the player to understand. In this case, by providing the configuration described in the above feature A1, even if the configuration is such that no advantage or disadvantage occurs between the set values with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit, the first corresponding pattern is stopped. It is possible to make the player predict the set value based on the probability that a predetermined profit is given to the display.

Feature A3. The pattern display means includes a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variablely displaying a pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area.
The picture display control means controls the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in the picture display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means.
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the predetermined event is notified of a predetermined stop order as a stop order of variable display of symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas.

According to the feature A3, the player is made to pay attention to the notification of the stop order by giving the predetermined profit based on the notification of the predetermined stop order as the stop order of the variable display of the pattern. It will be possible. In this case, by providing the configuration described in the above feature A1, even if the configuration is such that no advantage or disadvantage occurs between the set values with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. It is possible to have the player predict the set value based on the probability that a predetermined profit is given to the notification of the predetermined stop order as the order.

Feature A4. The probability that the predetermined event will occur in the predetermined situation (non-BB state) is higher in the second set value than in the first set value.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the probability that the predetermined event occurs in a specific situation (BB state) is higher in the first set value than in the second set value. ..

According to the feature A4, the tendency in relation to the set value of the probability that the predetermined profit is given for the occurrence of the predetermined event differs between the predetermined situation and the specific situation. This makes it possible for the player to predict the set value in a mode corresponding to each of the predetermined situation and the specific situation.

Feature A5. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S408 in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control for the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination. Execution means (function to execute the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72) and
A setting means (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the lottery process of the combination, the first combination (index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state and index value IV = 2 in the BB state in the first to fourth embodiments, index value IV = 2 in the BB state, and index in the non-BB state in the ninth embodiment). Predetermined profit (transition to AT state) on condition that at least one condition is that the value IV = 1 to 3) is won or the first winning combination corresponding to the first winning combination is established. , Addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state) (in the first to fourth embodiments, steps S141 to S1412, step S1416, step S1504 to step S1505, step S1604 and step in the main MPU 72. It has a function of executing the process of S1704, and in the ninth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2404 in the main MPU 72).
The probability of winning the first combination and granting the predetermined profit is the same or substantially the same among the set values of the plurality of stages.
As the winning combination to be drawn in the lottery process of the winning combination, the second combination (index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state and index value IV = 3 in the BB state, the ninth implementation in the first to fourth embodiments). In the morphology, there is an index value IV = 4) in the non-BB state,
When the second corresponding prize corresponding to the second combination is established, the first corresponding pattern (first to fourth) which is one of the combination of the pattern and the pattern which is stopped and displayed when the first corresponding prize is established. In the embodiment of, the combination of watermelon symbols and the combination of bell symbols in the ninth embodiment) are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of winning the second combination is different between the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature A5, since the predetermined profit is given on the condition that the first winning combination is won or the first corresponding winning is established, the player wins the first winning combination or the first correspondence. The game will be played with the expectation that a prize will be established. In this case, since the probability of winning the first role and granting the predetermined profit is the same or substantially the same among the set values of a plurality of stages, there is an advantage or disadvantage among the set values regarding the granting of the predetermined profit. It is possible to prevent it from occurring.

In addition, a second combination is set in which the first corresponding pattern, which is stopped and displayed when the first corresponding winning is established, is stopped and displayed when the winning is established, and the probability of winning the second combination is second. The 1 set value and the 2nd set value are different. As described above, the first corresponding pattern is stopped by having the configuration in which the probability of winning the first combination and giving a predetermined profit is the same or substantially the same among the set values of a plurality of stages. The probability that a predetermined profit will be given when displayed is different between the first set value and the second set value. As a result, even if the configuration is such that there is no advantage or disadvantage between the set values regarding the granting of the predetermined profit, the player is set based on the probability that the predetermined profit is granted for the suspension of the first corresponding pattern. It is possible to predict the value.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the predetermined profit is different from the profit given by the control by the corresponding execution means when the first corresponding prize is established.

According to the feature A6, since the predetermined profit is given as a profit different from the profit given to the control by the corresponding execution means when the first corresponding prize is established, the player's attention to the given the predetermined profit. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature A7. The predetermined profit-giving means executes a profit-giving lottery process based on the fact that the first winning combination is won or the first corresponding prize is established, and when the profit-giving lottery process is won, the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to feature A5 or A6, which is characterized by giving a predetermined profit.

According to the feature A7, the player expects not only that the first corresponding prize is established but also that he / she wins in the profit-giving lottery process, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A7, wherein the predetermined profit is not given in either the case where the second winning combination is won or the case where the second corresponding winning prize is established.

According to the feature A8, since the predetermined profit is not given in either the case where the second role is won or the case where the second corresponding prize is established, the predetermined profit is not given in consideration of the influence on the probability of giving the predetermined profit. It is possible to set the winning probability.

Feature A9. The probability of winning the first combination in the combination lottery process is the same or substantially the same among the set values of the plurality of stages.
The probability that the predetermined profit will be given when the first combination is won in the lottery process of the combination or the first corresponding prize is established is the same or substantially the same among the set values of the plurality of stages. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A8, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A9, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while making it possible to divert the data that determines each of the winning probability of the first winning combination and the granting probability of the predetermined profit between the set values. ..

Feature A10. In the corresponding execution means, after the variable display of the pattern, the winning corresponding pattern, which is one of the pattern corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination and the combination of the patterns, is displayed in the effective correspondence stop area. If there is, the control of the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination is established.
Features A5 to A9 characterized in that the first corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in the effective corresponding stop area regardless of whether the first corresponding winning is established or the second corresponding winning is established. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature A10, the player can predict the set value based on grasping the probability of giving a predetermined profit to the stop display of the first corresponding pattern in the effective correspondence stop area.

Feature A11. The stop area in which the first corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed when the first corresponding prize is established is different from the stop area in which the first corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed when the second corresponding prize is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A10.

According to the feature A11, it is possible to achieve the effects as already described while making it possible to strictly distinguish between the first corresponding prize and the second corresponding prize.

Feature A12. When the second combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the stop display is not displayed when the first corresponding pattern is stopped depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, but when the first combination is won, the stop display is displayed. The game according to any one of features A5 to A11, wherein another corresponding symbol (combination of symbols corresponding to the establishment of the first supplementary prize), which is one of a combination of symbols and symbols that are not displayed, can be stopped and displayed. Machine.

According to the feature A12, when a skilled player wins the second role, the first corresponding pattern is not displayed as a stop, but another corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the second role can be played. It is possible to individually grasp the winning probability and predict the set value based on it.

Feature A13. When the second combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the case where the first corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the other corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to the feature A12.

According to the feature A13, when the second role is won, the stop operation is performed so that the first corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in order to give a more advantageous profit, or the second role is won. It is possible to let the player select whether to perform a stop operation so that another corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in order to grasp the probability individually.

Feature A14. The probability of winning the second combination in a predetermined situation (non-BB state) is higher in the second set value than in the first set value.
The probability of winning the second combination or the combination corresponding to the second combination in a specific situation (BB state) is higher in the first set value than in the second set value. The gaming machine according to any one of A13.

According to the feature A14, the tendency in relation to the set value of the probability that the predetermined profit is given to the stop display of the first corresponding pattern differs between the predetermined situation and the specific situation. This makes it possible for the player to predict the set value in a mode corresponding to each of the predetermined situation and the specific situation.

Feature A15. The pattern display means includes a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variablely displaying a pattern.
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area.
The picture display control means controls the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture in the picture display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means.
One of the first combination and the second combination is a combination in which a corresponding prize can be established when the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined corresponding order.
The other combination of the first combination and the second combination is a combination in which the corresponding prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas.
This gaming machine is
A means for notifying the order of the predetermined correspondence when one of the winning combinations is won (a function of executing the process of step S411 in the main MPU 72) and
A means for notifying the predetermined order of correspondence when the other combination is won (a function of executing a dummy notification process in the main MPU 72) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A14.

According to the feature A15, even if the configuration is such that there is no advantage or disadvantage between the set values regarding the granting of the predetermined profit, the probability that the predetermined profit is granted when the order of the predetermined correspondence is notified Can be made different between the first set value and the second set value. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the notification of the predetermined order of correspondence.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D18, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features A1 to A15. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S408 in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control for the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination. Execution means (function to execute the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72) and
A setting means (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning combination to be drawn in the lottery process of the winning combination is a predetermined combination (index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state, index value IV = 2 in the BB state) and a specific combination (index value IV = 5 in the non-BB state). , The index value IV = 3) in the BB state exists.
Predetermined profit (transition to AT state, on the condition that at least one condition is that the predetermined winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination or that the predetermined winning combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is established. (Addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state) is given, and at least that the specific combination is won in the lottery process of the combination or that the specific combination is won and the specific correspondence prize corresponding to the specific combination is established. As one condition, a predetermined profit-giving means (a function of executing the processes of steps S141 to S1412, step S1416, steps S1504 to S1505, step S1604 and step S1704 in the main MPU 72) is provided.
The total probability of winning the predetermined combination and granting the predetermined profit and the probability of winning the specific combination and granting the predetermined profit is the same or abbreviated among the set values of the plurality of stages. Identical and
The probability of winning the predetermined combination and the probability of winning the specific combination, the probability that the predetermined profit will be given when the predetermined combination is won, and the probability that the predetermined profit will be given when the specific combination is won. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of each of the probabilities is different between the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature B1, the predetermined profit is given when the predetermined combination is won or the predetermined response prize is established, and the predetermined profit is given when the specific combination is won or the specific response prize is established. Is given, so that the player plays the game while expecting these to occur. In this case, the total probability of winning the predetermined combination and giving the predetermined profit and the probability of winning the specific combination and giving the predetermined profit is the same or substantially the same between the set values. , It is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the set values with respect to the granting of a predetermined profit. In addition, the probability of winning a predetermined role and the probability of winning a specific role, the probability of giving a predetermined profit when winning a predetermined role, and the probability of giving a predetermined profit when winning a specific role. At least one of each of the above is different between the first set value and the second set value. As a result, the player is given a predetermined profit because of the ratio of the predetermined profit given to the predetermined role and the specific role and the probability that the predetermined profit is given to each of the predetermined role and the specific role. It is possible to predict the set value.

Feature B2. The probability that the predetermined combination is won and the predetermined profit is given and the probability that the specific combination is won and the predetermined profit is given are different between the first set value and the second set value. The gaming machine according to the feature B1.

According to the feature B2, even if the probability that the predetermined profit is given is the same or substantially the same between the set values, the probability that the predetermined profit is given by winning the predetermined combination and the specific combination are won. Then, it is possible to predict the set value by grasping the ratio with the probability that the predetermined profit is given.

Feature B3. The probability that the predetermined profit will be given when the predetermined combination is won is higher in the second set value than in the first set value.
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the probability that the predetermined profit is given when the specific combination is won is higher in the first set value than in the second set value.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to predict the set value by grasping the type of the combination that is likely to trigger the granting of the predetermined profit.

Feature B4. The probability that the predetermined profit will be given by winning the predetermined combination is higher in the second set value than in the first set value.
The game according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the probability that the specific combination is won and the predetermined profit is given is higher in the first set value than in the second set value. Machine.

According to the feature B4, it is possible to predict the set value by grasping the probability that the predetermined profit is given when the predetermined combination or the specific combination is won.

Feature B5. A predetermined corresponding pattern (combination of watermelon symbols), which is either a predetermined pattern or a combination of predetermined patterns, is stopped and displayed when the predetermined corresponding prize is established.
Any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that a specific correspondence pattern (combination of bell symbols), which is either a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns, is stopped and displayed when the specific correspondence prize is established. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B5, it is possible to grasp which of the predetermined correspondence prize and the specific correspondence prize has occurred based on the result of the stop display.

Feature B6. When the specific correspondence prize is established, the predetermined correspondence pattern (combination of watermelon symbols), which is one of the combination of the symbols and the symbols that is stopped and displayed when the predetermined correspondence prize is established, is stopped and displayed.
The feature is that the stop area in which the predetermined correspondence symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined correspondence prize is established is different from the stop area in which the predetermined correspondence symbol is stopped and displayed when the specific correspondence prize is established. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5.

According to the feature B6, the predetermined corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed regardless of whether the predetermined corresponding prize is established or the specific corresponding prize is established, so that the player who expects to be given the predetermined profit It is expected that the predetermined corresponding pattern will be stopped and displayed. Then, since the stop area in which the predetermined corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed differs depending on whether the predetermined corresponding prize is established or the specific corresponding prize is established, the player who wants to predict the set value is stopped and the predetermined corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed. We will focus on the area.

Feature B7. When the specific combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the predetermined corresponding pattern is not stopped and displayed depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, but the pattern and the pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein another corresponding symbol (combination of symbols corresponding to the establishment of the first supplementary prize), which is one of the combinations of symbols, can be stopped and displayed.

According to the feature B7, when a skilled player wins a specific role, the probability of winning the specific role can be determined by stopping and displaying another corresponding pattern instead of stopping and displaying the predetermined corresponding pattern. It is possible to grasp each individual and predict the set value based on it.

Feature B8. When the specific combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the case where the predetermined corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed is more advantageous to the player than the case where the other corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to the feature B7.

According to the feature B8, when a specific combination is won, a stop operation is performed so that a predetermined corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in order to give a more advantageous profit, or the winning probability of the specific combination is individually set. It is possible to let the player select whether to perform a stop operation so that another corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in order to grasp the probability.

Feature B9. The predetermined profit is different from the profit given by the control by the corresponding execution means when the predetermined correspondence prize is established and the profit given by the control by the corresponding execution means when the specific correspondence prize is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

According to the feature B9, when the predetermined corresponding prize or the specific corresponding prize is established, the predetermined profit is given as a profit different from the profit given to the control by the corresponding execution means. It is possible to raise the degree of attention of the person.

Feature B10. The predetermined profit-giving means executes a profit-giving lottery process based on the fact that the predetermined combination is won or the predetermined corresponding prize is established, and when the profit-giving lottery process is won, the predetermined profit is given. Is granted, the profit-giving lottery process is executed based on the fact that the specific combination is won or the specific corresponding prize is established, and the predetermined profit is given when the profit-giving lottery process is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

According to the feature B10, the player expects not only that the first corresponding prize is established but also that the player wins the profit-giving lottery process, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D18, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features B1 to B10. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S408 in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control for the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination. Execution means (function to execute the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
In each of the first gaming state (ART state) and the second gaming state (AT state and normal mode or first RT mode), a predetermined profit (number of continuous games in the ART state) different from the control corresponding to the winning combination A function of executing the process of step S1908 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment, and executing the processes of steps S2005 and S2007 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment. A function, in the eighth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2108 in the main MPU 72) is provided.
At least, the first lottery result (winning at the index value IV = 16 in the second RT mode in the non-BB state) exists as the lottery result of the lottery process of the winning combination in the first game state.
In the second game state, the probability of the first lottery result is lower than that in the first game state, or in the second game state, the first lottery result does not occur.
The predetermined profit-giving means is
The first corresponding granting means for granting the predetermined profit on the condition that the result of the first lottery is obtained in the first gaming state (in the sixth embodiment, affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the main MPU 72). The function of executing the process of step S1908, the function of executing the process of step S2005 after making an affirmative decision in step S2004 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment, and the step in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment. (Function to execute the process of step S2108 after making an affirmative determination in S2102) and
By making the advantage regarding the granting of the predetermined profit for the granting opportunity other than the result of the first lottery in the lottery process of the winning combination between the first gaming state and the second gaming state different. The second corresponding granting means (in the sixth embodiment, in step S1904 in the main MPU 72) so that the advantages of the first gaming state and the second gaming state are the same or substantially the same with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit. The function of executing the process of step S1908 after making an affirmative determination, the function of executing the process of step S2007 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment, and the affirmative determination in step S2104 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment. Function to execute the process of step S2108 after
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, since the predetermined profit is given in each of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the player can give the predetermined profit in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. You will expect it. Further, since the predetermined profit is given on the condition that the result of the first lottery is obtained in the first game state, it is expected that the result of the first lottery will be obtained in the first game state. On the other hand, in the second game state, the probability of the first lottery result decreases or the first lottery result does not occur. As a result, in the second gaming state, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the opportunity to give a predetermined profit other than the result of the first lottery. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, even if the probability of the first lottery result is reduced or the first lottery result is not obtained in the second game state, the first lottery result is obtained in the combination lottery process. Since the advantage regarding the granting of the predetermined profit with respect to the granting opportunity differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the advantage between the first gaming state and the second gaming state with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit Same or almost the same. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while not giving a difference in the advantage between the first gaming state and the second gaming state with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit.

Feature C2. The second corresponding granting means is a lottery result that can be generated in the lottery process of the winning combination in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and both the first gaming state and the second gaming state. The advantage of the second lottery result (winning at the index value IV = 4 in the non-BB state), which is the lottery result that can trigger the granting of the predetermined profit, in relation to the granting of the predetermined profit from the first gaming state. Also, by making the second gaming state higher, the advantages of the first gaming state and the second gaming state with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit are the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to the feature C1.

According to the feature C2, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the result of the second lottery in the second gaming state as compared with the first gaming state. Further, even in the configuration in which the player's expectation that the result of the second lottery will be obtained in the second game state is increased in this way, the advantage in the first game state and the second game state with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit is obtained. It is possible not to give a difference to. Further, since the second lottery result triggers the granting of the predetermined profit even in the first gaming state, the trigger for granting the predetermined profit becomes easy for the player to understand.

Feature C3. The second corresponding granting means is characterized in that the probability of the second lottery result and the predetermined profit being granted is higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature C3, the player's ability to obtain the second lottery result in the second game state while not giving a difference in the advantage between the first game state and the second game state with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

Feature C4. The second corresponding granting means has the same or substantially the same probability that the second lottery result will be obtained in the first game state and the second game state, while the predetermined value in the case where the second lottery result is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the probability of giving a profit is made higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

According to the feature C4, the player's attention to the second lottery result is increased in the second game state while the probability of the second lottery result is not significantly different between the first game state and the second game state. Is possible.

Feature C5. The second corresponding granting means makes the amount of the profit granted when the predetermined profit is given as the result of the second lottery process higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4.

According to the feature C5, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player with the result of the second lottery in the second game state and the predetermined profit being given.

Feature C6. In the second corresponding granting means, the lottery result of the lottery process of the winning combination in the second gaming state becomes the second lottery result (disappearance result) that does not trigger the granting of the predetermined profit in the first gaming state. In this case, the predetermined profit can be given, so that the advantages of the first gaming state and the second gaming state are the same or substantially the same with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit. C1 The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature C6, the second lottery result that did not trigger the granting of the predetermined profit in the first gaming state becomes the trigger for granting the predetermined profit in the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness to the fact that the predetermined profit is given as a trigger of the second lottery result in the second game state. Further, even with the configuration in which the unexpectedness is given in this way, it is possible to prevent the difference in the advantage between the first gaming state and the second gaming state with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit.

Feature C7. The first lottery result is the result of winning the first granting combination in the lottery process of the combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the second lottery result is the result of winning the second granting combination in the combination lottery process.

According to the feature C7, the corresponding prizes can be established in each of the case where the first lottery result is obtained and the case where the second lottery result is obtained. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to clarify that the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery have been obtained.

Feature C8. One of the first lottery result and the second lottery result is the result of winning a predetermined combination in the lottery process of the combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the other of the first lottery result and the second lottery result is a result of not winning any of the winning combinations in the lottery process of the winning combination. ..

According to the feature C8, it is possible to make the first lottery result and the second lottery result clearly different. In addition, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the result that no combination is won in the combination lottery process.

Feature C9. The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a re-gaming prize is established is higher than that of the second gaming state.
The first lottery result is a lottery result in which the winning combination that enables the establishment of the re-game winning is won in the lottery process of the winning combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, which does not result in the first lottery result in the second gaming state.

According to the feature C9, even in the second game state in which the probability that the re-game winning is established is lower than that in the first game state and the first lottery result is not generated accordingly, the first game state with respect to the granting of the predetermined profit. And the advantage can be the same or substantially the same.

Feature C10. As a combination to be drawn in the lottery process of the combination, a predetermined mode corresponding combination (index in the non-BB state) that enables the establishment of a predetermined prize (bell prize) when the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the predetermined mode. Values IV = 1-3) exist
Both the first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the predetermined mode is notified when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination.
The gaming machine includes means for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S1710 in the main MPU 72) when a predetermined fall condition is satisfied in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C9.

According to the feature C10, there is a high probability that the re-game winning will be established, and even if the predetermined fall condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, which is the gaming state in which the predetermined mode is notified when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won. Although the probability that the re-game winning is established is low, the gaming state shifts to the second gaming state, which is the gaming state in which the predetermined mode is notified when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won. As a result, even if a predetermined fall condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from being extremely lowered. Furthermore, it has the configuration of the above feature C1, and even in the second gaming state, the advantage regarding the granting of the predetermined profit is the same as or substantially the same as the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player in the second gaming state.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D18, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features C1 to C10. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S408 in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control for the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination. Execution means (function to execute the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72) and
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a combination to be drawn in the lottery process of the combination, a predetermined mode corresponding combination (in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) capable of establishing a predetermined prize when the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the predetermined mode. The index value IV = 1 to 3) and the predetermined prize can be established regardless of whether the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the predetermined mode or not in the predetermined mode. A combination (index value IV = 4 in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) and is present.
This gaming machine is
A first notification means for notifying the predetermined mode when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination (a function of executing the processes of steps S2203 to S2204 in the main MPU 72, for notification in the effect side MPU 82). Function to execute processing) and
A second notification means for notifying the predetermined mode when the common combination is won in the lottery process of the combination (a function of executing a dummy notification process in the main MPU 72, a function of executing a notification process in the effect side MPU 82). )When,
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of winning the common combination in the combination lottery process and notifying the predetermined mode differs between a situation favorable to the player and a situation disadvantageous to the player. ..

According to the feature D1, when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won, the predetermined prize is established on condition that the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the predetermined mode, so that the player is in a state of being notified of the predetermined mode. You will expect that. In this case, even if the predetermined mode is won regardless of whether or not the predetermined mode is stopped, the predetermined mode can be notified and the common combination is won and the predetermined mode is won. The frequency with which is notified differs between situations that are favorable to the player and situations that are unfavorable to the player. This makes it possible for the player to predict whether the situation is advantageous or disadvantageous based on the execution frequency of the notification in the predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. As the predetermined mode corresponding combination, the first predetermined mode corresponding combination (index value IV = 3 in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) in which the predetermined mode is the first predetermined mode, and the predetermined mode is the second predetermined mode. There is a second predetermined mode corresponding combination (index value IV = 1 in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments).
When the common combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the second notification means can notify the first predetermined mode, and can notify the second predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature D2, the type of the predetermined mode to be notified when the common combination is won is not limited to one type, so that the type of the predetermined mode to be notified can trigger the execution of the notification of the predetermined mode. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the predetermined mode corresponding combination and the common combination.

Feature D3. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a set value of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
The probability of winning the common combination in the combination lottery process and notifying the predetermined mode is characterized in that the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages are different. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, it is possible to predict the set value from the frequency at which the predetermined mode is notified or the frequency at which the predetermined prize is established without the predetermined mode being notified.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the probability of winning the predetermined mode corresponding combination is the same or substantially the same among the set values of the plurality of stages.

According to the feature D4, the probability that the predetermined mode is notified when the common combination is won in the configuration in which the probability of winning the predetermined mode corresponding combination is the same or substantially the same among the set values is the first set value and the second. Since it differs from the set value, it is possible to predict the set value from the frequency at which the predetermined mode is notified. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the notification of the predetermined mode.

Feature D5. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a set value of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
There are a plurality of types of the predetermined modes, and there are a plurality of types.
When the common combination is won and the predetermined mode is notified, the selection rate of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified is the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, which is characterized by being different from each other.

According to the feature D5, the set value can be predicted from the selectivity of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the type of the predetermined mode to be notified.

Feature D6. In the situation where the second set value is the first set value, when the common combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the first predetermined mode is notified as the predetermined mode, and the second set value is used. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein when the common combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in a certain situation, the first predetermined mode is not notified.

According to the feature D6, when the first predetermined mode is notified, there is a high possibility that the first set value is used instead of the second set value. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the first predetermined mode is notified.

Feature D7. When the predetermined mode is elected and the predetermined mode is notified by the first notification executing means (image display device 63) under the control of the first notification means, it corresponds to the type of the predetermined mode to be notified. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the main MPU 72) so that the display is executed by the second notification execution means (special display unit 100).
The notification control means is a means for causing the second notification execution means to display a number corresponding to the first set value when the first predetermined mode is notified by the first notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature D7, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the first set value by grasping the display content of the second notification executing means when the first predetermined mode is notified.

Feature D8. When the notification control means is elected to the common combination and the first notification execution means notifies the predetermined mode, the common display is the first regardless of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified. 2. The gaming machine according to feature D7, which comprises means (a function of executing the process of step S2507 in the main MPU 72) to be performed by the notification executing means.

According to the feature D8, when the common combination is won and the predetermined mode is notified by the first notification executing means, the common display is the second notification executing means regardless of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified. It will be done at. On the other hand, when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won and the first predetermined mode is notified, the number corresponding to the first set value is displayed by the second notification executing means. As a result, in order to grasp that it is the first set value when the common combination is won and the first predetermined mode is notified, when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won and the first predetermined mode is notified. It becomes necessary for the player to memorize the contents of the second notification executing means in the above.

Feature D9. Predetermined profit giving means capable of imparting a predetermined profit (addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state) different from the control of the winning combination correspondence in at least one of the case where the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won and the case where the common combination is won. (In the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2404 in the main MPU 72, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 in the main MPU 72, and in the twelfth embodiment, the step in the main MPU 72. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, which comprises a function of executing the process of S2704, and a function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment).

According to the feature D9, a predetermined profit may be given when a predetermined prize is established. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined prize.

Feature D10. The predetermined profit-giving means can give the predetermined profit when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won, and does not give the predetermined profit when the common combination is won. The gaming machine described in D9.

According to the feature D10, a predetermined profit can be given when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won, whereas a predetermined profit is not given when the common combination is won. Therefore, a game for notifying the predetermined mode. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the person. In this case, even if the common combination is won, the predetermined mode can be notified, so that it is possible to create many situations in which the expectation that the predetermined profit is given increases.

Feature D11. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a set value of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
The probability that the predetermined profit will be given by winning the predetermined mode corresponding combination is the same or substantially the same among the set values of the plurality of stages.
The description in feature D10, wherein the probability of winning the common combination and notifying the predetermined mode is different between the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D11, the probability that the predetermined profit is given by winning the predetermined mode corresponding combination is the same or substantially the same among the set values of a plurality of stages, which is advantageous among the set values with respect to the giving of the predetermined profit. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent disadvantages from occurring. In addition, since the probability of winning the common combination and notifying the predetermined mode differs between the first set value and the second set value, there is no advantage or disadvantage between the set values regarding the granting of the predetermined profit. Even with this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the set value based on the probability that the predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined profit is given.

Feature D12. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a set value of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
The probability that the predetermined profit will be given by winning the predetermined mode corresponding combination is the same or substantially the same among the set values of the plurality of stages.
There are a plurality of types of the predetermined modes, and there are a plurality of types.
When the common combination is won and the predetermined mode is notified, the selection rate of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified is the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages. The gaming machine according to the feature D10 or D11, which is characterized by being different from each other.

According to the feature D12, the probability that the predetermined profit is given by winning the predetermined mode corresponding combination is the same or substantially the same among the set values of a plurality of stages, which is advantageous among the set values with respect to the giving of the predetermined profit. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent disadvantages from occurring. In addition, when a common combination is won and a predetermined mode is notified, a predetermined profit is given because the selection rate of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified differs between the first set value and the second set value. Even if the configuration is such that no advantage or disadvantage occurs between the set values, it is possible to make the player predict the set value based on the frequency of notification for each type of predetermined mode.

Feature D13. The predetermined profit-giving means can give the predetermined profit when the common combination is won, and does not give the predetermined profit when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won. The gaming machine according to D10.

According to the feature D13, the predetermined profit can be given when the common combination is won, whereas the predetermined profit is not given when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won, so that the predetermined mode is not notified. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the winning. In this case, since the predetermined mode can be notified even when the common combination is won, not only the predetermined mode is notified without the predetermined mode being notified and the predetermined prize is established, but also the predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined prize is established. It is possible to draw the player's attention to what he does.

Feature D14. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a set value of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
4. The probability of winning the common combination and notifying the predetermined mode is described in feature D13, wherein the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages are different. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D14, it is possible to make the player predict the set value based on the frequency at which the predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined prize is established. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the notification of the predetermined mode.

Feature D15. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a set value of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
There are a plurality of types of the predetermined modes, and there are a plurality of types.
When the common combination is won and the predetermined mode is notified, the selection rate of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified is the first set value and the second set value included in the set values of the plurality of stages. The gaming machine according to the feature D13 or D14, which is characterized by being different from each other.

According to the feature D15, when the predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined prize is established, the player can predict the set value based on the type of the predetermined mode that is the notification target. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the type of the predetermined mode to be notified.

Feature D16. In the situation where the second set value is the first set value, when the common combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the first predetermined mode is notified as the predetermined mode, and the second set value is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features D13 to D15, wherein the first predetermined mode is not notified when the common combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in a certain situation.

According to the feature D16, when the first predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined profit is given, it is determined that the first set value is not the second set value. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the first predetermined mode is notified.

Feature D17. When the predetermined mode is elected and the predetermined mode is notified by the first notification executing means (image display device 63) under the control of the first notification means, it corresponds to the type of the predetermined mode to be notified. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the main MPU 72) so that the display is executed by the second notification execution means (special display unit 100).
The notification control means is a means for causing the second notification execution means to display a number corresponding to the first set value when the first predetermined mode is notified by the first notification execution means. The gaming machine according to feature D16, characterized in that

According to the feature D17, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the first set value by grasping the display content of the second notification executing means when the first predetermined mode is notified.

Feature D18. When the notification control means is elected to the common combination and the first notification execution means notifies the predetermined mode, the common display is the first regardless of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified. 2. The gaming machine according to feature D17, which comprises means (a function of executing the process of step S2507 in the main MPU 72) to be performed by the notification executing means.

According to the feature D18, when the common combination is won and the predetermined mode is notified by the first notification executing means, the common display is the second notification executing means regardless of the type of the predetermined mode to be notified. It will be done at. On the other hand, when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won and the first predetermined mode is notified, the number corresponding to the first set value is displayed by the second notification executing means. As a result, in order to grasp that it is the first set value when the first predetermined mode is notified and the predetermined profit is given, the case where the predetermined mode corresponding combination is elected and the first predetermined mode is notified. It becomes necessary for the player to memorize the contents of the second notification executing means in the above.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D18, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features D1 to D18. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S408 in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel rotation processing and reel stop processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control for the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination. Execution means (function to execute the processing of step S309 and step S1110 in the main MPU 72) and
A setting means (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result (index value IV = 4 in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the situation where the set value of the plurality of stages is the first set value, the pattern When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the special result in the situation where the first stop mode can be notified as the stop mode of the variation display of the above and the second set value among the set values of the plurality of stages. Is characterized in that it is provided with a special notification means (a function of executing a dummy notification process executed by the main MPU 72 in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) so that the first stop mode is not notified. A game machine to play.

According to the feature E1, when the first stop mode is notified, there is a high possibility that the first set value is used instead of the second set value. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the first stop mode is notified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. The special result is a lottery result in which a special prize (bell prize) can be established regardless of whether the stop mode of the variable display of the pattern is the first stop mode or not the first stop mode. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature E2, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result, the special prize can be established regardless of whether or not it is the first stop mode, which affects whether or not the special prize is established. It is possible to make the player predict the set value by notifying the stop mode when a special result is obtained while not giving the result.

Feature E3. When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the special result, a predetermined profit giving means (nineth implementation) capable of giving a predetermined profit (addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state) different from the control corresponding to the winning combination. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2404 in the main MPU 72, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 in the main MPU 72, and in the twelfth embodiment, the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 72 is executed. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that the function of the game is provided, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature E3, a predetermined profit may be given when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result.

Feature E4. In addition to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination being the special result, the feature that the event in which the predetermined profit is given does not occur when the first stop mode is notified and the special prize is established. The gaming machine described in E3.

According to the feature E4, it is determined that it is not the second set value when the predetermined profit is given when the first stop mode is notified and the special prize is established. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the notification of the first stop mode.

Feature E5. When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is another result (index values IV = 1 to 3 in the ninth to eleventh embodiments), the first stop mode is notified and the special prize is established. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the predetermined profit is not given while it can occur.

According to the feature E5, there are a case where a predetermined profit is given and a case where a predetermined profit is not given when the first stop mode is notified and the special prize is established. Then, when the predetermined profit is given in the situation, it is determined that the value is not the second set value. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the first stop mode is notified and the special prize is established.

Feature E6. When the notification of the stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means (image display device 63) under the control of the special notification means, the display corresponding to the type of the notified stop mode is displayed by the second notification execution means (image display device 63). It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the main MPU 72) to be executed by the special display unit 100).
The notification control means is a means for causing the second notification execution means to display a number corresponding to the first set value when the first stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that

According to the feature E6, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the first set value by grasping the display content of the second notification executing means when the first stop mode is notified.

Feature E7. As a combination to be drawn in the lottery process of the combination, a predetermined mode corresponding combination (in the ninth to thirteenth embodiments) capable of establishing a predetermined prize when the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the predetermined mode. Index value IV = 1-3) exists,
The special notification means includes means for causing the predetermined mode to be notified by the first notification executing means when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won.
In the notification control means, when the result of the lottery process of the combination is the special result and the stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means, which type of stop mode is notified. The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized in that the common display is provided by the second notification executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2507 in the main MPU 72). ..

According to the feature E7, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result and the stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means, the common display is performed regardless of the type of the stop mode to be notified. Is performed by the second notification execution means. On the other hand, when the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won and the first stop mode is notified, the number corresponding to the first set value is displayed by the second notification executing means. As a result, in order to grasp that the result of the lottery process of the combination is the first set value when the first stop mode is notified as a special result, the predetermined mode corresponding combination is won and the first stop is performed. It becomes necessary for the player to memorize the contents of the second notification executing means when the mode is notified.

Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D18, and the features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of the features E1 to E7. Good. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These gaming machines include a control means such as a CPU, a read-only storage means such as a ROM, and a read / write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes the process according to the program read from the read-only storage means while writing the information to the read / write storage means and reading the information from the storage means. When executing this process, information is input from the sensor or the like to the control means, and information is output from the control means to the electric actuator or the light emitting element. It is also known that a control means, a read-only storage means, a read / write storage means, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet, a winning combination lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process of the winning combination is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control at. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the winning combination, the player is given the privilege corresponding to the winning combination. As the grant of the privilege, for example, a game medium is granted.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 63 ... Image display device, 72 ... Main side MPU, 82 ... Directing side MPU, 100 ... Special display section.

Claims (1)

A pattern display means that displays the pattern in a variable manner,
The start operation means operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the start operation means.
A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and a combination lottery means.
A stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means that controls the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern, the control for the winning combination is executed as the winning of the winning combination. The means of execution and
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a special result in the situation where it is the first set value among the set values of the plurality of stages, the first stop mode can be notified as the stop mode of the variation display of the pattern. to, when the result of the lottery process of the role in a situation which is the second set value among the plurality of stages of set value is a special result above and special informing means the first stop mode from being informed ,
When the notification of the stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means under the control of the special notification means, the display corresponding to the type of the notified stop mode is executed by the second notification execution means. Notification control means and
Equipped with a,
The notification control means is a means for causing the second notification execution means to display a number corresponding to the first set value when the first stop mode is notified by the first notification execution means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images